Electronics Projects Volume 15 Bak PDF

Electronics Projects
Vol. 15
ELECTRONICS
PROJECTS
VOL. 15
EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd

D-87/1 Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-1
New Delhi 110020
EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd.
First Published in this Edition, January 2003
Reprinted in November 2000
Reprinted in April 2003, February 2007
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any

form without the written permission of the publishers.
ISBN 81- 88152 -08 -0
Published by Ramesh Chopra for EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd,

D-87/1, Okhla Industrial Area, Phase I, New Delhi 110020.
Typeset at EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd and
Printed at J.K Offset, C-21, DDA Shed,
Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-1, New Delhi 110020
FOREWORD
This volume of Electronics Projects is the thirteenth in the series
published by EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd. It is a compilation of 23
construction projects and 77 circuit ideas published in Electronics
For You magazine during 1994.
In keeping with the past trend, all modifications, corrections and

additions sent by the readers, have been included with each project,
along with the replies and amendments, if any, proposed/suggested
by the authors themseleves. It is a sincere endeavour on our part to
make each project as error-free and comprehensive as possible.
However, responsibility cannot be taken if readers are unable to
make a circuit successfully, for whatever reason.
This collection of a large number of tested circuit ideas and

construction projects in a handy volume would provide all classes
of electronics enthusiastsbe they students, teachers, hobbyists or
professionalswith a valuable source of electronic circuits, which
can be fabricated using readily-available and reasonably-priced
components. These circuits could either be used independently or
in combination with other circuits, described in this and other
volumes. We are sure that this volume, like its predecessors, will
generate tremendous interest among its readers.
EFY Books & Publications
FOR YOU
EFY is a reputed information house, specialising in electronics and information technology
magazines. It also publishes directories and books on several topics. Its current publications are:
(A) CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
1. Electronics Projects, Vol. 1: A compilation of selected construction projects and circuit ideas Rs 120
published in Electronics For You magazines during 1979 and 1980.
2. Electronics Projects, Vol. 2 to 19 (English version): Yearly compilations (1981 to 1998) of Rs 120 (each)
interesting and useful construction projects and circuit ideas published in Electronics For You.
3. Electronics Projects, Vol. 20, 21 and 22 (with CD): Yearly compilations (1999 to 2001). Rs 150 (each)
4. Electronics Projects, Vol. 16 (fgUnh laLdj.k): Yearly compilations (1995) of interesting and Rs 95
useful construction projects and circuit ideas published in Electronics For You.
(B) OTHER BOOKS
1. Learn to Use Microprocessors (with floppy): By K. Padmanabhan and S. Ananthi (fourth enlarged edition). Rs 180
An EFY publication with floppy disk. Extremely useful for the study of 8-bit processors at minimum expense.
2. ABC of Amateur Radio and Citizen Band: Authored by Rajesh Verma, VU2RVM, it deals Rs 75
exhaustively with the subjectgiving a lot of practical information, besides theory.
3. Batteries: By D.Venkatasubbiah. Describes the ins and outs of almost all types of batteries used Rs 60
in electronic appliances.
(C) DIRECTORIES
1. EFY Annual Guide: Includes Directory of Indian manufacturing and distributing units, Buyers Guide and Rs 300 (with CD)
Index of Brand Names, plus lots of other useful information.
2. i.t. Directory: First comprehensive directory on IT industry covering hardware, software, telecom, Rs 250 (with CD)
dotcom and training institues.
3. Technical Educational Directory: Includes course-wise and state/city-wise listings of technical educational Rs 100
institutes in India, besides the alphabetical main directory offering all the relevant information about them.
(D) MAGAZINES
1. Electronics For You (EFY): In regular publication since 1969, EFY is the natural choice for the entire Rs 60 (with CD)
electronics fraternity, be it the businessmen, industry professionals or hobbyists. From microcontrollers to Rs 35 (without CD)
DVD players, from PCB designing software to UPS systems, all are covered every month in EFY.
2. Linux For You (LFY): Asias first magazine on Linux. Completely dedicated to the Open Source community. Rs 100 (with CD)
Regular columns by Open Source evangelists. With columns focused for newbies, power users and developers,
LFY is religiously read by IT implementers and CXOs every month.
3. i.t. (Information Technology): A monthly magazine for Techies and those who want to be. Its readers have Rs 30
two things in commona background related to IT and the thirst to know more. Topics covered boast technical
depth and aim to assist in better usage of IT in organisations.
4. Facts For You: A monthly magazine on business and economic affairs. It aims to update the top decision makers Rs 50
on key industry trends through its regular assortment of Market Surveys and other important information.
5. ePower: Published every alternate month for the electronic-power industry, primarily consists of all electronic Rs 50
power-supply equipment, and their related components and services. A must read for those in this industry and
those catering to it.
6. BenefIT: A technology magazine for businessmen explaining how they can benefit from IT. Rs 20
Kindly note that these prices can change without any notice. Magazines 1 Year 2 Years 3 Years 5 Years
Registered Post or Courier Delivery for Books and CDs: (Monthly) Rs Rs Rs Rs
Rs 40 for first copy, and Rs 15 for every additional copy of
any book or directory. Electronics For You (with CD) 500 920 1,290 1,800
Add Rs 50/- on an outside Delhi cheque. Electronics For You (without CD) 335 630 880 1,260
Important: The prices mentioned here are the current prices at Information Technology 300 575 810 1,255
the time of publication; please reconfirm the prices before
placing order, or be prepared to pay the differenceif any Linux For You (with CD) 725 1,395 1,950 3,000
Payment should be sent strictly in advance by demand draft/money ePower (bi-monthly) 180 360 540 900
order/postal order in favour of EFY associates KitsnSpares.
Facts For You 400 700 1,000 1,600
BenefIT 190 360
For retail orders: For magazine subscriptions: For bulk orders:
KitsnSpares EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd Paramount Book Agency

D-88/5, Okhla Industrial Area, D-87/1 Okhla Industrial Area, Phase-1 Arch No. 30 (West Approach)
Phase-1, New Delhi 110020 New Delhi 110020 Mahalaxmi, Mumbai 400034
Phone: 26371661, 26371662 Phone: 26810601-03 Phone: (022) 24925651, 24927383
E-mail: [email protected] Fax: (011) 26817563 Fax: 24950392
Website: www.kitsnspares.com E-mail: [email protected] E-mail: [email protected]
CONTENTS
Section A: Construction Projects
1. A Versatile Receiver for DXers ................................................................................. 3

2. Gongs and Alarm for CMOS LED Dial Clock .......................................................... 8
3. Hi-Fi Stereo Cassette Deck ........................................................................................ 12
4. Digital Chess Clock ................................................................................................... 20
5. Cordless Security System .......................................................................................... 24
6. Microprocessor-Based Capacitance and Resistance Measurement Meter ................ 27
7. BFO for Receiving SSB Signals ................................................................................ 30
8. Safety Indicators and Aids ......................................................................................... 33
9. Portable SMD Soldering Station ............................................................................... 37
10. Digital Controller for Outdoor Lights ....................................................................... 40
11. VOX for Ham Rigs .................................................................................................... 43
12. Steady Hand Game ..................................................................................................... 46
13. Teleconversation Limiter ........................................................................................... 49
14. Programmable Number Lock ..................................................................................... 52
15. Humidity Controller ................................................................................................... 57
16. Doorbell-Cum-Security Alarm .................................................................................. 59
17. Improved Three-Phase Power Supply Card .............................................................. 65
18. Solidstate Advertisement Display .............................................................................. 67
19. Auto-Changing In/Out Indicator With Door-Bell ..................................................... 70
20. Telex-Computer Changeover Switch ......................................................................... 73
21. 60W Active Amplifier System ................................................................................... 76
22. Impedance Meter ........................................................................................................ 80
23. Interruption Counter cum Burglar Alarm .................................................................. 86
Section B: Circuit Ideas:
1. Digital Even and Odd Parity Checker/Generator ...................................................... 94

2. SW Booster For DXers .............................................................................................. 95
3. Intercom for Your Home ............................................................................................ 95
4. Slave Switch ............................................................................................................... 96
5. Morse Interpulse Time Period Counter ..................................................................... 97
6. Amplifier Taciturner .................................................................................................. 98
7. Remote Audio Level Indicator ................................................................................... 99
8. Simple Karaoke Circuit ............................................................................................. 99
9. Transistorised Walkman Radio Player .................................................................... 100
10. Safety Circuit for Instant Water Heater ..................................................................... 101
11. Long Duration Sequential Timer With IC MM5387 ................................................. 102
12. Telephone Silencer ..................................................................................................... 104
13. Control Circuit For In/Out Counter ........................................................................... 105
14. Low-Cost Pulse Generator ......................................................................................... 106
15. Top-Secret Code Lock ............................................................................................... 107
16. Accurate Frequency-to-Voltage Converter ................................................................ 108
17. Rolling Electronic Dice ............................................................................................. 109
18. Gradually Turning-Off Courtesy Light ...................................................................... 110
19. Digital On-Off Timer ................................................................................................. 111
20. Rain-Operated Wiper ................................................................................................. 113
21. Programmable 100-Day Timer .................................................................................. 113
22. Phase Sequence Detector cum Single-Phase Protector ............................................. 114
23. Multichannel Touch Switch ....................................................................................... 115
24. Two-In-One Switch Circuit ....................................................................................... 116
25. Stereo Audio Level Indicator ..................................................................................... 117
26. Keyboard With Strobe Signal .................................................................................... 118
27. Hybrid Audio Output Amplifier ................................................................................ 119
28. Sawtooth Wave Generator ......................................................................................... 119
29. Multichannnel Water Level Monitor-cum-Controller ............................................... 120
30. Programmable 100-hour Timer .................................................................................. 121
31. -30 to +30V Regulated Power Supply ....................................................................... 123
32. SCR/Triac Tester cum Distinguisher ......................................................................... 124
33. Thermometer Add-on to Multimeter ......................................................................... 125
34. Listening Bug ............................................................................................................. 126
35. Telephone Tapping/Misuse Indicator ......................................................................... 126
36. Electronic Calling System ......................................................................................... 127
37. Hen Sound Emulator .................................................................................................. 129
38. Phone Line Monitor ................................................................................................... 129
39. Improved Pest Repeller .............................................................................................. 130
40. Logic Level Detector cum Continuity Tester ............................................................ 131
41. Flora Caretaker ........................................................................................................... 131
42. Electronic Candle ....................................................................................................... 132
43. Motor Protector And Water Level Indicator .............................................................. 133
44. 360W Hi-Fi Stereo Power Amplifier ......................................................................... 133
45. Regulated Power supply With Short-Circuit Protection ........................................... 134
46. Musical Greeting Cards ............................................................................................. 135
47. Temperature Controlled Fan ...................................................................................... 136
48. Line Synchronised Oscillator .................................................................................... 138
49. Electronic Fuse ........................................................................................................... 138
50. Polarity Tester ............................................................................................................ 139
51. Low-Cost 4- to 16-line Decoder ................................................................................ 140
52. Automatic Volume Control ........................................................................................ 141
53. Musical Continuity Tester .......................................................................................... 141
54. Hi-Q Stereo Mixer ..................................................................................................... 142
55. 1Hz Master Oscillator ................................................................................................ 143
56. Super Simple Timer ................................................................................................... 143
57. Stereo Disconnector With Timer ............................................................................... 144
58. Frequency Filter for Playing Old Records................................................................. 145
59. Static Starter ............................................................................................................... 146
60. Headphone Adaptor for Hi-Fi Stereo ......................................................................... 146
61. Linear Bulb Light Controller ..................................................................................... 147
62. Electronic Automobile Horn ...................................................................................... 148
63. Call Bell For The Impatient ....................................................................................... 149
64. 0-10V Amplifier ......................................................................................................... 149
65. A Sensitive Touch Switch .......................................................................................... 150
66. Remote TV Tester ...................................................................................................... 151
67. pH Meter .................................................................................................................... 152
68. Cordless Intercom ...................................................................................................... 152
69. A Simple Battery Charger .......................................................................................... 154
70. Temperature Sensor for Power Amplifiers ................................................................ 155
71. Telephone Monitor ..................................................................................................... 156
72. A Binary Frequency Meter ........................................................................................ 157
73. Caretaker For Home Appliances ................................................................................ 158
74. 40W +40W Auto-Reverse Stereo Cassette Player ..................................................... 160
75. Remote TV Headphones ............................................................................................ 161
76. Infrared Remote Control Tester ................................................................................. 162
77. Soft Radio/Cassette Selector ...................................................................................... 163
SECTION A:
CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
A VERSATILE RECEIVER
FOR DXERS
KANG K.P.S.
D
espite the increasing Ham fra- fed to a mixer, where it is mixed with source configuration, providing a gain
ternity in India, commercial the local oscillator frequency of almost of approximately 12 dB. 2N3823 has
Ham equipment is still a the same frequency. The resultant out- been selected for its low noise and high
dream for an average amateur radio put, which is AF, is amplified for the transductance. But BFW10 can be sub-
enthusiast. And truly, it seems beyond desired power to drive a loudspeaker stituted in case of its nonavailability,
the reach of an average zealot to pur- or a headphone set. An AF narrow- compromising a little on the overall
chase such sophisticated commercial band filter can be introduced between performance.
equipment, specially the high-grade re- the mixer and the AF amplifier, since Common-source configuration has
ceivers. This is why several enthusi- such designs lack selectivity. Other- been used for little loading of the input
asts give up the hobby soon after get- wise, the output would span over al- tank circuit and excellent gain. Bipolar
ting their licences. most the entire AF spectrum, which stages have been tested in the proto-
Here is a simple and versatile, low- can be detrimental, specially when one type, but these tend to be rather un-
cost receiver design for such readers. It threads a weak CW out from a crowded stable and nonlinear. FET in this stage
can be built in a few spare evenings band. also helps better IMD, an important
with the minimum of effort and expen- The design is also popularly known factor for any serious DXer.
diture. The receiver can be modified as a homodyne, since it is a hetero- Both input and output are tuned for
easily for other bands (right through dyne, with the same injection frequency good front-end selectivity and spuri-
top band to 2-metre). It can be used and zero IF. ous rejection. A 50-ohm antenna termi-
with your existing transmitter or as a As the overall sensitivity depends nation has been provided, using a link
stand alone receiver for your shack. upon AF gain, it is quite easy to achieve tapping on coil L1 for proper imped-
The receiver, despite being low-cost, is a good sensitivity and a low noise fig- ance matching.
very dynamic and certainly beats the ure with a dexterous design. But add- Good results can be obtained with
commercial black-boxes, costing more ing too much gain will be troublesome properly tuned preselector stage on
than ten times. and a microphonic effect will result. 160M, 80M, 40M and 20M bands. But
A DC (direct-conversion) design has This is because tiny currents will be above these frequencies, a preselector
been selected for its low cost and dy- produced during vibrations and these stage often creates a problem. So,
namic operation, with easy assembling current changes will be amplified by above these frequencies, it could be
and requirement of minimum align- high-gain AF amplifier, producing a left outusing a tuned circuit directly
ment. Low-cost and easily-available howling sound. at the input of IC1, with an impedance
components have been selected. Philips The aimed per-
NE602 has been selected for its bal- formance has been
anced operation for good AM suppres- derived from the
sion, excellent IMD and very low noise. circuit, which com-
Further, the chip in its 8-pin DIL pack- prises three inte-
age has an on-chip oscillator/buffer grated circuits and
another plus point over the other chips, two field effect
such as 3039, 3028 and 1496. transistors (FETs).
The operation of the receiver is very The preselector
simple, as shown in the block is designed around
diagram.The input signal is first am- Tl, an FET. It op-
plified in RF preselector stage and is erates in common Fig.1: Block diagram of the receiver.
ELECTRONICS PROJECTS-15 3
+ 4 turns
18 turns
Fig.2: Circuit diagram of the receiver.

4 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS-15
Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout of the receiver.
transformation ratio of about 1: 3.5 for Plug-in band-changing has been in the oscillator tank circuit. The out-
connecting a dipole antenna. employed in the prototype for its ease put (AF) is taken from pins 4 and 5 of
The 8-pin chip (IC1) has an on- in assembly and operation. Coil LX is the IC through a transistor-type driver
chip oscillator, two cross-wired differ- actually a plug-in inductor which can transformer, commonly available in the
entials as double balanced mixer, and a be changed for 20- and 40-metre bands. local market.
buffer for oscillator. It works very well with the given com- Suitable value for capacitor Cl2 can
The chip works with a 6.2V supply, ponent values. The receiver can be used be found by experimenting. It shorts
which is obtained using zener diode Dl for other bands (almost any band from out any trace of RF components at the
at its pin 8. The input is given at pins 1 60- metre to 2-metre), simply by modi- output and also peaking X1s primary
and 2 with a suitable impedance trans- fying the oscillator tank circuit, com- for certain frequency around 700 Hz,
formation by coil L2. Capacitors C6 to prising capacitors C6 to Cll and coil aiding in CW DXing. Any value be-
C11, together with coil LX form the LX. tween 0.001 and 0.47F will do.
tank circuit for the oscillator, which The on-chip oscillator is tolerably A low-noise preamplifier stage fol-
operates in the Collpitt configuration. stable, provided a sturdy wiring is used lows the mixer, designed around tran-
Fig.4: Component layout of the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

made to rove through a 2-pole, nar-
row-band AF filter, wired around low-
noise op-amp TL072. Switch Sl pro-
vides a choice of selecting a single pole
or two, depending on the type of
workAM/ SSB or CW, respectively.
The overall circuit provides good filter
characteristics at reasonable cost and
Fig. 5: Power supply arrangement for the receiver. helps to reduce the detrimental QRM
during CW DXing on crowded bands.
PARTS LIST LM386N is the useful amplifier with
Semiconductors:
just about 30 dB of gain at good signal-
C9 10-100pF air trimmer to-noise ratioan elegant addition to
IC1 NE602 buffer/oscillator C11 50pF air variable
IC2 (a,b) TL072 C12 (0.001 to 0.47F) the circuit, which provides sufficient
IC3 LM386N ceramic disc gain to drive a speaker. Capacitor C22
T1 2N3823/BFW10 C13,C20,C23 0.47F ceramic disc and resistor R19 form a high-pass filter
T2 BFW10 C14,C16,C18 0.001F, polyester
D1 6.2V zener for supersonics to avoid instability.
C15 47F, 16V electrolytic
Coil LX may be wound on a com-
Resistors (all 1/4watt, +5% carbon unless C21 470F, 16V electrolytic monly available 11mm Alladin former.
stated otherwise): C22 220nF ceramic disc The winding will have 13 turns of 28
R1 220-ohm C24 1000pF ceramic disc SWG for 40-metre band, while 20-
R2 470-ohm C25 220nF, 16V electrolytic
R3 180-ohm
metre band can be worked with 7 turns
C26,C27 10F, 16V electrolytic
R4 1.2-kilohm of 28 SWG. The cores of coils can be
R5 22-ohm Miscellaneous: adjusted for proper band limits and
R6 15-kilohm X1 Driver transformer with sealed with Bee-wax.
R7 18-kilohm 1.5k: 1.5k impedance A plug-in arrangement of band
R8 27-kilohm ratio
R9, R13 680-kilohm L1 2J type SW antenna
changing has been used for ease and
R10, R14 24-kilohm coil with 24 SWG, 4 reduced complexity. The coil, with its
R11, R15 33-kilohm turns link for base, is positioned near the right of the
R12, R16 1.8-megohm antenna winding back. Both the coils provide sufficient
R17 100-ohm L2 22 turns of 24 SWG
R18 100-kilohm
overlappings near both band-ends.
tapped 4 turns from
R19 2.2-ohm lower end primary and The receiver is designed for 12-volt
R20 4.7-ohm 8 turns secondary on battery operation, but it can be used
VR1 100-kilohm (log) PVC 1.27 cms air core with almost any well-regulated power
tube supply. Two RFCs of about 40 MHz or
Capacitors: LX (see text)
C1 (A,B) 2J gang (variable) S1 SPST toggle switch
more need be placed in both supply
C2 0.02F ceramic disc 4.8cms x 8-ohm lines, as shown in Fig.3. Otherwise, a
C3,C5 0.047F ceramic disc loudspeaker poignant hum will result.
C4 22F, 12V electrolytic Ribbon cable
C6,C7,C10 100pF polyester An indoor or long-wire outdoor an-
Suitable cabinet tenna will give good results, but a di-
C8 0.01F polyester
pole will certainly enhance the perfor-
mance of the receiver.
sistor T2, with about another 15 dB the source for optimum gain. Although the unit is quite simple in
elevation to AF signals. Resistors R5 Since the bandwidth of the receiver design, extremely good results can be
to R8 set the biasing of FET for linear at this stage is quite wide and spans obtained, if it is used skilfully. The pro-
Q point and capacitor C27 bypasses almost the full AF range, the signal is totype was able to receive 1-microvolt
input signal from Marconi PM 2952 ra-
diotelephone test set (G-land made).
Readers Comments: nal amplifier. FETs are costly, costing at least Rs40
Thank you very much for publishing 2. The Value of RFC is not clear. to 50 per piece?
such a good article on A Versatile Re- At 12 volts how much current should 6. Output from IC1 can be taken
ceiver For DXers. Kindly clarify the be provided? either from pin 4 or 5 and not both.
following: 3. The data of L2 is not given I.S. Rathod
1. The author has used IC NE602, clearly. Secondly, 50pF tuning capaci- Junagadh
a double balanced mixer. In its place tor is not available. In the article the author says that the
can IC NE612 be used? The pin 4. Can varactor diodes not be used given preselector cannot be used above
configurations for both the ICs are for tuning? twenty metre range. I think the prob-
same, but the latter contains an inter- 5. Can T2 be dispensed with, as lem is due to the use of FET BFW10.
In international data books, the fre- porated in the circuit. number of plates to get the desired
quency range of BFW10 is given as Ginish K. Varghese capacitance. (2) Use a 47pF capacitor
below 20 MHz. Therefore, for VHF Kerala in series with the standard variable
operation, BFW10 in the preselector capacitor.
must be replaced by MPF 102 or a The author, Mr K.P.S. Kang, replies: I never recommend the use of
similar VHF FET. Use of BFW10 at 2 I, first of all, thank all the readers for varactors in HF circuits. FETs are avail-
metre range is wrong. Also, at 2 metres, their valuable feedback and am pleased able at fairly cheap prices. Also, FETs
frequency modulation (FM) is used and to note their interest in the article. are specially selected for their low noise
not AM. The given circuit is a simple direct and very high input impedances. IC
Is IC NE612 equivalent to IC conversion receiver. NE602 in this arrangement is used in
NE602? IC NE602 contains voltage IC NE612 is a good alternative and balanced configuration, so both tails of
regulator stage internally. What is the can be substituted for NE602. While mixer are used for output. This pro-
need, therefore, of connecting an ex- using IC NE612, connect a 27k resis- vides maximum AM rejection.
ternal 6V zener diode in the circuit? I tor from pin 7 to ground. A preselector often causes trouble
think a current limiting resistor should The value of RFCs is in millihenry at 20 metres and neighbouring bands
be sufficient. Wherefrom can the IC and the circuit draws about 350mA at with a lot of QRN. So, it is better not
NE612 be obtained? 12V. to use a preselector stage in these
Pradeep G. All the formers diameter are bands.
Kerala given. The 50pF capacitors are easily SW booster circuit need not be used
With reference to the circuit A available in Delhi. However in case with the project, as it is provided on
Versatile Receiver For DXers, I of nonavailability, there are two al- board itself (constituted around T1).
would like to know how it can be ternatives: (1) Pick a standard vari- The sensitivity of the receiver is suffi-
converted into a transreceiver? The able capacitor and count its vanes cient for serious DX experimentation.
author is also requested to clarify (moving plates). Divide the total ca- The project can be converted into a
whether the circuit idea SW Booster pacitance value by the number of full-fledged transreceiver by inclusion
for DXers by Mr Pradeep G., published plates, so as to get capacity per plate. of a transmitter with the receiver.
on page 102 in this book, can be incor- By this method, you can remove any
GONGS AND ALARM
FOR CMOS LED DIAL CLOCK
AMRIT BIR TIWANA
An hourly gong, a regular alarm, a calendar, a day indicator and an AM-
PM indicatorthese are just a few of the facilities, described here, that
can be added to EFYs basic CMOS LED dial clock.
T
his article describes the func- All the circuits are built around eas- The circuits can, in fact, be inter-
tional and constructional de- ily available CMOS chips. This helps faced with any of the dial clock
tails of several features, such to keep the current consumption low, projects, published in EFY after slight
as an hourly pendulum gong, a regular maintain a wide supply voltage limit, alterations. The block diagram of the
alarm, a digital calendar, a day indica- economise the design and simulta- composite clock is shown in Fig. 1.
tor, and an AM-PM indicator, which neously obtain the maximum reliabil-
can be added to the basic CMOS dial ity. A complete power supply, along The hourly gong
clock, published in EFY, May 1990 is- with a battery backup facility, has also The feature of the hourly gong,
sue. These will enhance the clocks util- been included to adapt the clock for which was until now found only in the
ity to the maximum. mains operation. old mechanical clocks, can be added
Fig. 1. Block schematic of the composite dial clock.

When the alarm sounds, it may ei-
ther be disabled manually through S3
or it will automatically reset itself after
five minutes.
Calendar
The calendar comprises a day and a
date display. The display circuit is
shown in Fig. 4 and the date display
circuit in Fig. 5.
The day display uses the CMOS
octal counter CD4022BE, which is
wired to count up to seven. The IC
directly drives the LEDs that display
Fig.2: The hourly gong for the dial clock the day. The 1-ppd input is fed to clock
input of the IC, which counts up to
seven pulses and resets on the eighth.
quite easily to the dial clock as well. Alarm Switch Sl is used to set the days and
The circuit given in Fig. 2 produces the NAND gate is used to prevent
the sound of a huge hammer hitting a The circuit for an add-on alarm is debouncing.
brass gong, which is made highly real- given in Fig. 3. The alarm time can be The date display uses two CMOS
istic by the effective utilisation of the set, using the miniature 12-way CD4033BE counters, which are used
ADSR envelope effect. switchesSl for hours and S2 for min- to both count and drive the displays.
The circuit is based on a CMOS utes (minimum 5). S3 is used to enable The carry output of the first counter
LSI chip. The 1-pph (pulse per hour) or disable the alarm. is fed to the clock input of the next.
Fig.3: The alarm circuit.
output is fed to the enable input of the The circuit uses a CMOS timer The total number of pulses that can
IC through the level dropper, compris- 7555 in astable mode, which is en- be counted are 99. The circuit needs
ing the 10k resistor and the 4.7F ca- abled when pin 4 is at logic 1. Gate to be reset after the end of each
pacitor. The output signal is amplified Nl is used to multiplex the signals month, using switch S5. The initial
by Tl, which drives the loudspeaker. from the time set switches. The resetting is done through switch S6. The
The number of times the gong set terminal of IC 7555 goes high reset function can be made automatic
strikes corresponds to the timefor when the time displayed on the dial by the implementation of multi-input
example, ten gongs at 10 oclock and is the same as that preset. The alarm NAND gates, such as 4011,4023 or
eleven at 11 oclock. time may also be hard-wired. 4068.
AM-PM indicator PARTS LIST
The AM-PM indicator, Semiconductors:
IC1 CD45273
which is given in Fig. 6, is IC2 (N1-N4),
based on the CMOS IC7 (N5,N6) CD4093 NAND
CD4017BE counter that is IC3 7555 timer
wired as a simple flip-flop. IC4 CD4022 counter/divider
IC5,IC6 CD4033, 7-segment
The circuit provides AM-PM display driver
indication and simultaneously IC8 CD4017 decade counter
provides the 1-ppd output. IC9 (N7, N8) CD40106
The indication is provided IC10 A7809 regulator
through two LEDs. IC Tl BC157 pnp transistor
Dl 3.1V, 250mW zener
CD4017 can easily be substi- D2-D5 1N4001 rectifier diode
tuted with dual flip-flop ICs, D6 1N4002 rectifier diode
such as CD4013 or CD4027.
Resistors (all 1/4watt, +5% carbon, unless
stated otherwise) :
Seconds flasher R1,R5,R24 10-kilohm
Fig. 4: The day indicator circuit. R2 220-ohm
The seconds flasher, or the R3,R6,R-
R23,R25 1-kilohm
R4 100-kilohm
R7 150-kilohm
R8 12-kilohm
R26 68-kilohm
R27 680-ohm
VR1 22-kilohm (preset)
Capacitors:
Cl 4.7F, 16V electrolytic
C2 47pF ceramic disc
C4 0.01F ceramic disc
C6,C8 l0F, 16V electrolytic
C7 lF, 16V electrolytic
C9 1000F,250V electrolytic
Miscellaneous:
X1 230VAC primary to 0-12V,
Fig.5: Circuit diagram for the date display. 250 mA secondary
transformer
S1,S2 1-pole, 10-way
blinking/activity indicator, as rotary switch
it is commonly known, can S3 On-off switch
also be added to the clock. S4- S6 Push-to-on reset switch
Dis.1, Dis.2 FND543 common
As a IHz pulse source is not cathode display
available in the clock, an ex- 9V battery
ternal oscillator is used. The 8-ohm, 0.5W loudspeaker
circuit is built around the un- Green and red LEDs
General-purpose PCB
used gate of CD4093 IC. VR1
should be adjusted to make
the LED flash at a frequency order to maintain the counter status,
of 1 Hz. even in the event of power failure. The
circuit, which basically comprises a
Fig 6: The AM-PM indicator cum 1-ppd oscillator.
full-wave rectifier, followed by single-
Power supply chip regulator A7809, is fully self-
Although CMOS chips explanatory.
can work off supply voltages
between 3 and 15 volts, a
Construction
stable and regulated power The circuits may be made on a
supply (9V) should be used general-purpose PCB of suitable size.
to maintain timing stability Extreme care should be taken while
and display brightness. A suit- soldering the ICs, as most of these
able circuit is given in Fig. 8. are of the CMOS type. The use of
The circuit is provided with sockets is recommended. A 10-watt
Fig.7: The seconds flasher circuit. an in-built battery back-up in iron with 60/40 type solder may be
used for soldering.
The assembled circuits can be fixed
behind the main board, using 6mm
spacers. The LED indicators can be ac-
commodated on the main panel board
itself.
The circuits given here are actually
independent, and only the ones required
need to be constructed, except for Fig.
6, which is required wherever the 1-
ppd pulses are required.
The NAND gates can easily be
interchanged to facilitate easy inter-
Fig 8: Power supply for the circuits. wiring.
HI-FI STEREO CASSETTE DECK
T.S. SHANKAR
A
hi-fi system is a complete mal as well as chromium dioxide (CrO2) loop. The equalisation amplifier gets its
audio system, with a combina- and metal tapes; recording level con- input from low-level preamplifier, in-
tion of hi-fi stereo cassette trol and automatic level control; mic. tended to amplify low-level signals
deck, hi-fi stereo integrated amplifier, and aux. inputs with mic. mixing con- from magnetic head, mic. or aux. inputs.
hi-fi speaker systems, stereo tuner, ste- trol; remote muting and standby con- The output of the equalisation am-
reo-turntable and compact disc-player. trols. plifier is made to drive the peak level
My earlier article on stereo integrated The circuit uses AC bias at 100 kHz indicator, ALC (automatic level con-
amplifier forms the heart of a hi-fi sys- for recording and erasing. It provides trol) circuitry and recording circuitry
tem. To make a complete hi-fi system, requisite networks for properly biasing simultaneously. The same output is
stereo tuner and a cassette deck are also normal chromium (dioxide) and metal taken as line output through the muting
requiredthe remaining two, namely, tapes in recording as well as playback circuit. For recording purposes, the
stereo turntable and compact disc player modes, with correct amplitude and fre- record bias is generated by bias oscil-
are beyond the scope of this construc- quency emphasis. A visual indication lator circuit, which can bias normal,
tion project. In this article, I present a of the record-level is provided with ten chromium or metal tapes. 12-volt regu-
complete stereo cassette deck, to be segment resolutions, per channel. lated supply is provided to various
used in conjunction with the hi-fi ste- blocks of the circuit.
reo integrated amplifier, for making a The circuit
complete audio system. Characteristics of tapes
Fig.l shows the block diagram of the
Features circuit. The heart of the circuit is the The frequency characteristics of the
equalisation amplifier, which has three types of tapes are different and so
Special features of this project are: equalisation networks corresponding to are their bias levels. The normal (Fe2O3)
hi-fi recording and playback on nor- the type of tape used, in its feedback tapes are characterised as type I tapes
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the HI-FI stereo deck
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the HI-FI stereo deck
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the HI-FI stereo deck.
Fig. 4: Component layout for the HI-FI stereo deck.
and have an equalisation time of 120 to the inverting input through various the dot mode and the bar mode. The
s. These tapes can handle frequencies equalisation networks, meant for nor- former is used for recording and the
up to 15 kHz. mal, chrome and metal tapes in play- latter for playback. This is only for
The chrome (CrO2) tapes are called back or recording modes. convenience, and can be changed to
type II tapes and have an equalisation The network comprises 150-kilohm, suit ones choice. Pin 5 is the input,
time of 70 s. These tapes can handle 390-ohm, 2.2-kilohm and 1.8-kilohm which requires 1.25 volts for full-scale
frequencies up to 16 kHz. The metal resistors and 33nF, 2.2nF and 22nF ca- deflection.
tapes or metal alloy tapes are called pacitors for normal tape-playback and The display module gets the input
type III tapes and have an equalisation 47-kilohm and 750-ohm resistors and from the equalisation amplifier. The sig-
time of 70 s, these being capable of l0F capacitors for normal tape record- nal is clamped by a 1N4148 diode, rec-
handling frequencies up to 17 kHz. ing. The network has 150-kilohm, 680- tified and filtered by a 10F capacitor.
ohm and 1-kilohm resistors, and 22nF, The capacitor, along with 27-kilohm
Circuit diagram 1.8nF and 68nF capacitors for chrome preset resistor, forms an RC network to
and metal playback equalisation. It has smoothen the display level excursions.
The circuit diagram is shown in 47-kilohm and 1.8-kilohm resistors and The 27-kilohm preset is meant for
Fig. 2. Low-noise op-amps LA3161 are 8.2nF capacitor for chrome-recording playback level presetting. It comes un-
used for low-level preamplifier and equalisation and 47-kilohm and 2.2- der system alignment, which is dis-
equalisation amplifier. ICs LM3914 are kilohm resistors and 6.8nF capacitor cussed later.
used to display recording level in ten- for metal-recording equalisation. These
step resolution in both playback and values are in accordance with standard Recording
recording modes. IC 7812 is meant for NAB equalisation values, and hence
regulated supply of 12-volts at 300mA Recording can be done in two
should not be altered.
current capability. ways the ALC mode and the manual
The output of equalisation ampli-
The bias oscillator is a push-pull mode. Both the modes have their own
fier is used for three purposes. The out-
Hartley oscillator wired around low- advantages and disadvantages. In ALC
put is taken as line output, and the same
noise transistors BC149C. The ALC cir- mode, the ALC circuit automatically
output is used for peak level indicator
cuit uses low-noise BC149C transis- adjusts the output level to a relative
and recording circuit.
tors to attenuate the signal proportional level of 0 dB during normal recording
to the average input voltage. Peak level indicator and to + 3 dB level during chrome and
metal recording.
Low-level preamplifier LM3914 is an LED bar-graph dis- An AGC or ALC delay of 1000 sec-
play IC, specifically designed for peak onds is provided by two l00F ca-
The dual op-amp LA3161 ampli- level indicator. It has eleven op-amps pacitors and two 10-megohm resistors.
fies low-level signals of the order of in it, ten of which are wired as com- This is a large delay and can be re-
1.2 to 1.5 mV from the tape during parators and the eleventh as voltage duced to as much as 10 seconds, de-
playback and from mic. or aux. or both amplifier. The resistors at pins 6,7 and pending upon ones requirement.
during recording. The amplifier is a ground fix the LED current to 10 mA. The recording can be done in the
non-inverting type, with a voltage gain There are two modes of display manual mode where the ALC function
of 48. The output of this amplifier is
now sufficiently high (around 75 mV)
and can easily be used with attenuating
circuit like ALC loops. As the ampli-
fier has no equalisation, it has high-
frequency linearity. The output is fed
to the equalisation amplifier.
Equalisation amplifier
LA3161 pre-amps are used as
equalisation amplifiers. The pre-amps
are wired as large signal amplifiers,
with the output swinging to almost half
the supply voltage. As the IC handles
large signals, its quiescent input, and
hence its quiescent output, is fixed to
half the supply voltage by a resistor
divider, using 270-kilohm resistors at
the non-inverting inputs.
The gain of the amplifier is fixed
by a feedback resistor of 8.2 kilohms
and an input resistor of 330-ohms.
Feedback is provided from the output Fig. 5: Wiring diagram for HI-Fi stereo deck.
is disabled and the signal is attenuated BEL 187. The supply voltage is made dates all the components of the circuit.
manually. high for metal tapes, medium for CrO2 The rec./ play switch is 18-pole, 2-way
The advantage of the ALC function tapes and low for normal tapes, as these type. Two such switches are employed
is that no attention is required during tapes have different bias levels. here, one for each channel. However, it
recording, especially when the record- The output of the oscillator is fed is represented as single switch Sl in the
ing is done through microphone. In the to AC type Erase head and also to the circuit diagram. S2 is an 8-pole, 3-way
ALC mode, the circuit can handle fairly rec./play (R/P) heads. The 100kHz bias switch, usually used in 3-band radio
large signal ranges. But in no signal component and the signal from sets. Four-core flat ribbon cable may be
condition, the gain of the equalisation equalisation amplifier are mixed via used to wire this switch to the PCB. The
amplifier increases very much and as a 100-kilohm presets and 6.8-kilohm wire length should not be more than 15
result noise appears at the output. resistors, respectively before feeding cms. S3 is a 6-pole, 2-way switch used
Hence, ALC recording is not suitable to the R/P heads. A parallel resonant to select ALC or manual adjustment of
for dubbing. circuit (for 100 kHz) of l00pF capaci- rec. level control. S4 is a rec.-mute
tor and 23mH inductor blocks the bias SPDT type switch. Use ribbon cables
ALC circuit oscillator output from entering the for S3 and S4 too, with lengths not
equalisation amplifier circuitry. exceeding 15 cms. Use two core-
The output of the equalisation
shielded wires for stereo-head, mic, aux.
amplifier is clamped by a 1N4148 di-
ode, rectified by another 1N4148 diode Rec. muting inputs, fine output, rec. level pots, mic.
mixing pots etc as LM3914 ICs are
and filtered by a pair of l00F capaci- While recording from microphones, assembled on the motherboard itself, a
tors. The time delay is fixed with two a howling sound is produced from the 24-way ribbon wire may be used to
10-megohm resistors in parallel. The speakers due to acoustic feedback from connect the LEDs. The wire length
capacitors hold voltage proportional to the speakers to microphones. The vol- should be less than 40 cms. Although
the average of the output of the equali- ume of the power amplifier should be the circuit recommends AC erase head,
sation amplifier. This voltage decides lowered every time the record button a provision for DC erase head has also
the signal level attenuation. is depressed. Hence, a rec. mute circuit been made. Short these terminals, if the
The voltage across the 100F ca- is introduced, which automatically AC type erase head is used. Grounding
pacitors is mixed for keeping the rela- mutes the output while recording. The of all unconnected metal work should
tive record level unaltered, and fed to circuit uses two BC149C transistors in be done including the cabinet.
the attenuating transistors BC149C, deep saturation for the purpose. Rec.
wired as voltage-to-current converters. mute can be disabled by switch S4 dur-
The collector current is now propor- ing dubbing or aux. recording.
Alignment
tional to the average signal voltage. The circuit requires a bit of align-
This current varies the static resis- Power supply ment before it is put to use. The differ-
tance, i.e. the slope of the diode charac- ent adjustments are: playback level, bias
teristic curve of diode 1N4148. This Voltage is step-down from 230V AC
to 18-volt and 12-volt AC by trans- level and ALC.
static resistance, along with series re- For adjusting the playback level,
sistance of 22 kilohms from the output former X1. It has two secondary wind-
ings, one for 18-volt supply and the VR5 and VR6 are used. For adjusting
of low-level amplifier, forms a vari- these presets, record a tone of 1 kHz on
able voltage divider network to attenu- other for 12-volt supply. Instead of one
transformer, one may use two separate a good quality blank cassette in a good
ate the signal entering the equalisation quality cassette deck at 0 dB. Verify
amplifier. transformers for 18 volts and 12 volts.
The 18-volt AC is rectified by a in the same deck for record level of 0
Bias oscillator bridge rectifier, filtered by a 2200F, dB in the playback mode. Now, play
40-volt capacitor and the resultant volt- the cassette in this deck and adjust the
Bias oscillator circuit provides a si- age of around 24 volts is applied to the presets VR5 and VR6 such that the
nusoidal voltage output at 100 kHz at input pin of regulator IC 7812. The 12- first six LEDs are lit. Now the sixth
different levels, suitable for different volt output of IC5 is supplied to vari- LED corresponds to the 0 dB level.
types of tapes. The circuit is push-pull ous modules of the circuit. For adjusting VR7 and VR8, con-
Hartley oscillator, with tuned second- The 12-volt AC is rectified by a nect a 1kHz source to aux. terminals
ary. The push-pull configuration is half-wave rectifier and filtered by a and turn VR1 and VR2 completely to
utilised here for its superior character- l000F capacitor. The resultant 14-volt aux. side. Now, record this tone by
istics over conventional type. DC is given to motor through a leaf- pressing the record key in a blank cas-
L6 is a bias oscillator coil of type switch and a remote socket. The sette like Sony HF60. Now play the
Philips 38161.The prototype used such socket should be of normally-closed recorded tone and see whether the dis-
a coil, but it may be substituted by any type. Remote facility comes handy play shows 0 dB or not. If not, repeat
other suitable coil. The circuit oscil- while recording through microphones. the procedure once again after adjust-
lates at a frequency, decided by the ing VR7 and VR8 a little. Repeat until
secondary inductance and shunt capaci- the recorded level shows 0 dB, when
Construction recorded at 0 dB. During recording,
tance, which in this case is 100 kHz.
The power is supplied to this cir- A suitable PCB for the circuit is put ALC switch to manual position
cuit by voltage regulating transistor shown in Fig. 3. The PCB accommo- and adjust record level control to 0
PARTS LIST Even though a trifle expensive, this
circuit is cost-effective and would cost
Semiconductors: Capacitors:
IC1, IC2 LA3161 preamplifier C1,C4,C23,C24, only about one third of its equivalant
IC3,IC4 LM3914 dot/bar C27,C29,C46, commercially available decks, manu-
display C47,C54 10F, 25V electrolytic factured by reputed companies.
generator C2,C26,C28 1nF ceramic disc
IC5 LM7812 regulator C3 l00pF polysterene
T1-T4,T6,T7 BC149C npn transistor C5,C11 470F, 25V electrolytic
T5 BEL187 pnp transistor C6,C30 47lF, 25V electrolytic
D1-D5, D16-D20 1N4148 silicon switch- C7,C10,C25,C32,
ing diode C34,C48 lf, 25V electrolytic
D6-D15, C8,C12,C31,C35, Readers Comments:
D21-D30,D33 Green LED C53, C59 100F, 25V electrolytic
D31 Red LED C9,C33 22pF ceramic disc The circuit of Hi-Fi Stereo Cassette
D32 Orange LED C13,C36,C58 4.7F, 25V electrolytic Deck suffers from mistakes in the
D34 Yellow LED C14.C37 33nF polyester components layout as well as the PCB
D35-D40 1N4007 rectifier diode C15,C38,C52,C71 2.2nF polyester layout.
C16,C19,C39,C41 22nF polyester
Resistors (all 1/4watt, 5% carbon unless C18,C42 68nF polyester
After going through the circuit and
stated otherwise): C20,C43 6.8nF polyester comparing it with the components lay-
R1,R8,R27,R29, C21,C44,C57,C60, out, I found that the circuit diagram
R31,R39,R45, C65-C68 l00nF polyester and components layout do not match at
R62,R65,R66 47-kilohm C22,C45 8.2nF polyester many places. Mismatch occurs near
R2, R3, R40,R41 68-kilohm C29,C46,C47,
R4,R42 10-kilohm C54 lOf, 25V electrolytic switch S2g and at IC2 pins 1 to 4 and
R5,R43,R76 10-ohm C49,C50 470p styroflex/ the associated circuitry. Diode D39 is
R6,R38 6.8-kilohm polysterene missing in components layout near the
R7,R25,R26,R44 C51 2.7nF polyester supply of motor.
R60,R61, C55,C56 3.3nF polyester
R75,R80-83 1-kilohm C61,C63 l00nF ceramic disc
What type of mechanism was used
R9,R30,R64 750-ohm by the author?
R10,R47 10-megohm Miscellaneous: What is the output of the circuit?
R11,R17,R46,R52 330-ohm L1,L4 Record/play head And what is the number of the 23mH
R12,R21,R28, L2,L3 23mH coils coil used in the recording circuitry?
R48,R56,R63 2.2-kilohm L5 AC erase head
R13,R49 22-kilohm L6 Philips 38161 coil Vishwesh
R14,R19,R54 390-ohm L7 DC erase head Karwar
R15,R16,R50,R51 270-kilohm XI 230V AC, primary to Could the author please clarify my
R18,R53 8.2-kilohm 0-18V, 500mA second- doubts?
R20,R24,R55,R59 150-kilohm ary transformer
R22,R32, S1 18-pin record/play
There are no places for feedback
R57,R67 1.8-kilohm switch (2 nos)
resistor (8.2k) and input resistor of 330
R23,R58 680-ohm S2 8-pole 3-way switch ohms in equaliser amplifier section.
R33,R34,R68,R69 560-ohm S3 6-pole 2-way switch In equaliser amplifier IC LA3161
R35,R70 1.2-kilohm S4 SPDT switch receives supply voltage at pin 2 in the
R36,R71 12-kilohm S5 250V, 2A SPST switch
R37,R72,R77 4.7-kilohm PCB layout, which is not correct.
S6 Leaf switch
R73 270-ohm SK1,SK2 The 270k bias-divider resistor at
R74 910-ohm SK5.SK6 RCA sockets non-inverting input has no connection
VR1, VR2 22-kilohm linear dual SK3,SK4 Microphone Jacks on the other side, i.e. positive.
pots SK7 Front load cassette deck
VR3, VR4 100-kilohm linear dual
There is no place for 100F, 25V
mechanism
pots Suitable cabinet
electrolytic capacitors in the PCB.
VR5,VR6 22-kilohm trimpots Connecting wires, Rajesh Kumar Verma
VR7, VR8 100-kilohm trimpots shield wires, mains Varanasi (UP)
cord, screws, nuts and The circuit contains no details about
suggested PCB. 23mH coils (L2 and L3).
Can we use any other IC, instead of
LM3914?
dB. After adjusting VR7 and VR8, the mark. Benoy George
bias levels for chrome and metal tapes In this circuit, I have not compro- Wadakanchery
get adjusted automatically. ALC mised upon quality and sophistication. The circuit of Hi-Fi stereo cassette
adjustment is not needed, as the circuit As such, the circuit uses somewhat ex- deck is really superb. The only disad-
is so designed as to get self-adjusted. pensive components like LM3914 for vantage is its cost, as LM3914 ICs have
However, if at all the circuit does not peak-level display and dual-stage pre- been used in display section. If LB1405,
record the signal at 0 dB, try differ- amplifier for the preamplifier section. etc are used the cost of the project gets
ent values of R13 (and R49) from 10- The circuit also uses complex equalisa- reduced.
kilohm to 47-kilohm. At some value in tion networks and push-pull bias oscil- What is the cost of the PCB and of
between these two, the circuit should lator, which can otherwise be substi- the circuit?
record the 1kHz signal up to 0 dB tuted by simpler versions. Can we use the amplifier, using
STK459 with the positive rail con- mistakes were noticed in PCB layout. coil. It must be available in the market
nected to regulator (IC 7812) input, Please, verify the circuit diagram and as 25mH coil. Otherwise, it can be con-
thereby eliminating the need for a sepa- correct the PCB layout with black ink structed by winding 350 turns of
rate transformer, with common ground- before making the PCB. 48SWG copper wire on core, taken out
ing? For 23 mH coil, wind approximately from the coil of a 36cm B&W TV. after
G.Chandra Mouli 500 turns of 45SWG copper wire on removing the original coil and magnet
Anantapur 6mm ferrite bead. Adjust bias oscilla- placed on the linearity coil.
On the upper right hand side in Fig.4 tor coil for resonance. Since input impedance of the
a 390-ohm resistor ends nowhere, This cassette deck can be used with preamplifier is very high, any head is
which cannot be possible. the integrated amplifier of Feb. '93 is- suitable for the circuit. LM3914 can-
Binoy K. Shah sue. It is advisable to always use a sepa- not be substituted by any other IC. In-
rate power supply to reduce interfer- deed, no tracks have been provided for
The author, T.S. Shankar, comments: ence, humming and motorboating, etc. feedback circuit of LA3161. I deeply
I am very glad to see the interest Please, make some pads and tracks regret the mistake. Fortunately, enough
taken by the readers in my article on for the components R17, R18, R52, place exists in the area around LA3161.
Hi-Fi stereo cassette deck. R53, C12 and C35 in the vacant space Similar correction can be made for sup-
Instead of LM3914 circuit, any dis- remaining near IC2 with a black pen. ply pin of LA3161 after following the
play circuit can be used with sensitiv- there is no mistake with S2g switch. circuit diagram.
ity of around 1V for full scale display. Tracks near IC2 pins 1 to 4, are wrong For the 270k resistors, please short
But expensive LM3914 is worth the and must be corrected. Diode D39 may circuit the joint of 270k resistors to the
cost. be fixed on motor terminals. adjacent pin 4 track of LA3161 with a
For R/P switch, use a tension string, I used imported soft-touch deck solder bridge.
such as radio dial cord with a suitable mechanism. Playback head of 250-ohm The project cost me around Rs
arrangement for operation. impedance is suitable. 2000, including cabinet, deck mecha-
I am sorry to say that a number of There is no type number for 23mH nism etc.
DIGITAL CHESS CLOCK
S.BATRA
R
ecently, one of my colleagues, 150 minutes by either of the player. (i.e. pins 33,34 and 32). This will reset
who is an ace player of chess, The dot in the running clock will be the clock having drive. Hence, both the
mentioned the fate of the chess blinking as the seconds indicator. This clocks can be reset to 000, one by one
clock of their recreation club. The old way, it may meet all the above-men- by operating switches Sl and S8. Please,
mechanical clock is taken out of the tioned specifications. note that pins 38 of IC2 and IC3 are
cupboard once in a year, at the time of connected to Vcc, which makes the
the annual tournament. With the humid Circuit diagram clocks run in the 24-hour mode. If pin
climate of Bombay, the clock is rusted 38 is kept open, the clock will run in a
The complete circuit diagram of the
and is no more reliable. He urged for a 12-hour mode and, while resetting, the
chess clock is shown in Fig. 2. The
Digital Chess Clock, a novel idea and a clock will reset to 12:00 hour.
commonly available 40-pin ICs,
new design for India. Before I agreed Using diodes D5 and D 12, it utilises
LM8361 or its equivalents, are used
to his proposal, he gave me the follow- the same switches S3 and S2 for ALARM
for identical Black and White clocks.
ing specifications: DISPLAY/ALARM OFF functions of Black
The IC MM5369 along with the quartz
1. There should be two indepen- and White clocks, respectively. The
crystal is used as the Master Oscillator,
dent clocks for both the players. power is provided through a conven-
which supplies 60Hz drive to the
2. The umpire should be capable of tional 12-0-12 volts transformer and
clocks. The operation of switch S8 will
resetting the clocks to a reference time. full-wave rectifier. The 9-volt battery
cut off the drive from one clock and
3. After thinking and playing the provides the backup during power in-
extend to the other clock. As the clock
move, the player should operate a le- terruptions, if any. Hence, there are two
is generally required for two hours and
ver to stop his own clock and at the buses of supplies. Vcc (A) has battery
30 minutes, three-digit display is ad-
same time start the opponents clock. backup whereas Vcc (B) does not have
equate.
4. There should be a facility to battery backup. Total current drain is
Alarm outputs are ORed through
watch the movement of the clock also. about 300 mA at 12 volts.
two diodes and directly extended to
5. If either of the player takes more
the trigger terminal of a piezo buzzer. Assembly
than 150 minutes to complete all the
Reset switch Sl extends the Vcc to
moves, there should be a time-out indi-
SLOW SET, FAST SET and SEC. DISPLAY The complete circuit shown in Fig.2
cation.
6. The clock should be an accurate
and reliable one.
Principle
With the above specifications in
mind, a block diagram was drawn, as
shown in Fig. 1. To have an accurate
and reliable time, a quartz-controlled
master oscillator is utilised to provide
the drive for the clocks. It will supply
the drive to either a Black Clock or the
White Clock. The reset switch will
bring the clocks to 000. With the help
of switch S2, an alarm at 2:30 hours
has to be set before the start of the
match in each clock. A common piezo
buzzer will sound after the lapse of Fig. 1: Block diagram for the digital chess clock.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the digital chess clock.
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the chess clock.
Fig. 4: PCB layout for the display.
Fig. 5: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 MM5369 oscillator/divider
IC2,IC3 LM8361 clock chip
D1-D4 1N4001 rectifier diode
D5-D14 1N4148 switching diode
Resistors (all 1/4watt, +5% carbon unless

staled otherwise):
R1-R42 1-kilohm
R43 10-megohm
R44 100-kilohm
R45 330-kilohm
Capacitors:
Cl 470F, 25V electrolytic
C3 0-22pF variable trimmer
Miscellaneous:
X1 12-0-12 volts
500mA, sec. transformer
S1-S7 Push-to-on switches
S8 1-pole, 2-way Anchor make
Fig. 7: Suggested cabinet for the digital chess clock. switch
XTL 3.579MHz crystal
12-volt trigger type piezo buzzer
9-volt battery.
can be easily wired on two PCBs meas- Extend the power and test the
uring about 12 cms x 10 cms and 12 complete circuit. As soon as the power
cms x 3 cms. The actual-size layout of is switched on, the clock receiving the
both the PCBs is shown in Figs. 3 and drive may start blinking. Press the re- the position of switch S8, may start
4, respectively. set switch and the clock will reset to blinking. Press the corresponding SLOW
The PCBs are designed in such a 000. Turn switch S8 to another posi- SET or FAST SET switch to stop the blink-
way that the segment outputs from tion and reset the second clock as ing. Bring switch S8 to the other posi-
clock PCB are in exact alignment with well. With the help of SLOW SET and tion and similarly stop the other blink-
the segment of display PCB, which can FAST SET switches, check the working ing display.
be mounted above the clock PCB at of both the clocks. Check that the sec- 3. By pressing switches S2, S3 and
right angle. Extra room in the clock onds dot blinks for the clock which RESET together, obtain 000 display for
PCB will make the assembly more is on and does not blink for the clock alarm. Now, keeping switches S2, S3
comprehensive and even the trans- which is off. pressed, adjust the display to 2:30 with
former, piezo buzzer, etc can be Now, set the alarm and see that it the help of SLOW SET/FAST SET switches.
mounted on the clock PCB itself. sounds at the desired time for both the One by one set both the alarms to 2:30.
First of all, check all the compo- clocks. 4. Bring switch S8 towards the
nents with the help of a multimeter. To The complete assembly can be White player and press RESET to get the
start with, assemble the display PCB housed in an acrylic cabinet. All the time as 000. Keeping switch Sl pressed,
with the six display chips. With the switches should be mounted on the top bring switch S8 towards the Black
help of 9-12 volts test bench power side of the cabinet for the sake of con- player. This clock will also reset to
supply through a 1 -kilohm series resis- venience. Further, care may be taken 000. The moment the RESET switch is
tor, check whether all the segments are that SLOW SET , FAST SET and RESET released, the time for White starts.
glowing properly. switches of both the clocks are not pro- 5. After playing his move, the White
Now assemble the clock PCB. Sol- jected outside the cabinet, and they are player should shift switch S8 towards
der all the resistors and check them accessible only through a pen/pencil. himself. This will stop his clock and
subsequently. Then solder all the di- This will prevent their accidental press- the clock of Black player will start.
odes and finally all the three ICs. Con- ing by anyone, and hence the time will 6. If anyone of the players takes
nect display PCB and clock PCB with not be disturbed. more than 150 minutes, the alarm will
43 fine wires at right angle and solder sound and indicate the end of the game.
them. Connect the flexible wires of Instructions for umpire The analogue chess clock available
about 15cm length to the clock PCB in the market has the problem of inher-
for various switches. 1. Energise the clock with mains ent delay due to inertia after operating
supply and insert a 9-volt battery in the the lever. This delay, which can be up
Testing battery terminals. to 2.5 seconds in a typical case, is elimi-
2. One of the clocks, depending on nated with this digital clock.
CORDLESS SECURITY SYSTEM
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
S
ecurity is one of the major probl-
ems encountered nowadays in
big cities. Security systems
available in the market are costly and
cord-based. When such gadgets work,
they produce unwanted noise through
the speakers or buzzers. These devices
are generally light-operated or infrared
light-controlled, and are more suited Fig. 1: Block diagram of the cordless security system.
for use in homes.
But think of a situation when you plifier and an RF transmitter. 1kHz signal available from the
are out shopping, while your car is ly- (a) Multivibrator: Transistors Tl multivibrator. The signal available from
ing unguarded in the parking lot. Once and T3 work as an astable multivibra- the collector of transistor T4 is fed to
inside the shop, you have no control tor, whose frequency is about 1kHz. the noninverting input of BEL1895.
over your vehicle and may fall an easy This signal is then amplified by tran- This IC is wired in its noninverting
prey to car-lifting. In such situations, sistor T4 to get a higher output. amplifier configuration. The output is
cordless security systems come to your Transistor T2 works as an electronic available from pin 2
rescue. While away from your valu- switch for the multivibrator. When of BEL1895.
able gadgets, of course within a lim- switch Sl is kept closed, due to the (c) RF Transmitter: The mixer-
ited range of distance, the cordless se- reverse bias on its base, transistor T2 cum-local oscillator circuit comprises
curity systems send out signals to you will be off. When switch S1 is released, transistor T5 and its associated feed-
if your goods are interfered with. transistor T2 supplies negative voltage back network. The tank circuit consists
This article enables you to fabri- to the multivibrator. of coil L1 and capacitor C16. By suit-
cate such a type of cordless security (b) IC Amplifier: BEL1895 is ably varying capacitor C16, the fre-
system. an eight-pin audio amplifier IC, gener- quency can be adjusted on the MW
ally used in radio circuits. In this cir- band. The feedback network comprises
Working principle cuit, it is used for amplification of the resistor R13 and capacitor C13.
The basic circuit is a combination
of a signal generator, an amplifier and PARTS LIST
a radio transmitter. The signal genera- Semiconductors: Capacitors:
tor produces an alarm sound if a switch T1-T4 BC548 npn transistor C1,C2 0.4F ceramic disc
T5 BF194B npn transistor C3 0.2F ceramic disc
is left open. The amplifier magnifies D1 1N4001 rectifier diode C4,C5,C8 0.1F ceramic disc
this signal and feeds it to the transmit- IC1 BEL 1895 audio C6,C13 0.01F ceramic disc
ter. The radio transmitter transmits this amplifier C7 200F, 12V electrolytic
signal in the MW band. A pocket radio C9,C12 470F, 12V electrolytic
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless C10 0.001F ceramic disc
receiver can be used as a detector. stated otherwise): C11 10F, 12V electrolytic
The range of the transmitter varies R1,R4 10-kilohm C13 0.01F ceramic disc
from 30 to 50 metres, making the sys- R2,R3,R5 220-kilohm C14 100F,, 12V electrolytic
tem convenient for use for cars parked R6 5.6-kilohm C15 33PF ceramic disc
within the transmitters range, and also R7 1-megohm C16 100pF trimmer
R8,R14 1-kilohm C17 47pF ceramic disc
for door/window security. The elimi- R9 4.7-kilohm
nation of use of wires/cords makes the R10 10-ohm Miscellaneous:
system cost-effective too. R11 100-kilohm S1 Push-to-on switch
R12 470-ohm L1 MW antenna coil (2J)
Circuit description R13
R15
47-kilohm
2.2-kilohm
Ferrite rod
Suggested PCB
The circuit comprises a transis- VR1 10-kilohm preset Clamps
Telescopic antenna (90cm)
torised astable multivibrator, an IC am-
The audio signal, when applied to
the emitter of transistor T5, modulates
the carrier wave, to generate the radio
signal. The amplitude modulated
output is available at the collector of
transistor T5. This signal is then trans-
mitted through a 90cm telescopic
antenna.
An ordinary AM receiver is suit-
able for receiving the signal. It would,
however, be better to use a Philips make
portable radio rather than any low-cost
receiver.
Easy fabrication
The PCB and component layout are
shown in Figs 3 and 4, respectively.
The PCB can be made either by the
ion-etching process or with the help of
PCB making kits available in the mar-
ket. For perfect soldering, use of good
solder and soldering iron are essential.
Use coloured wires for switch Sl, bat-
tery, antenna coil, etc to avoid confu-
sion. The coil can be fixed on the PCB.
Actual operation
After complete fabrication, release
switch Sl and power the circuit. Adjust
VR1 to mid-position and connect the
speaker between the negative terminal
of capacitor C14 and the positive rail
of supply. A continuous beeping sound
must be heard. Now, disconnect the
speaker and connect a telescopic an-
tenna, as shown in Fig. 2. Place a MW
radio about three metres away and tune
it to a null position. Now, adjust ca-
pacitor C16 and the ferrite rod of the
antenna coil to get a loud beeping sound
from the radio.
In order to get perfect sound from
the radio, adjust capacitor C16 and the
ferrite rod and MW receiver gang. Af-
ter getting a clear sound, adjust VR1 to
make it louder, but remember that the
quality of sound must be the same as
before. On pressing switch Sl, the sound
should cease. Only a small hissing
sound may be heard in this state. The
release of switch Sl should produce the
sound again.
The whole system can be housed in
a small cabinet. Use rectangular nickel
cadmium cells, if you wish to use it for
a long time. The MW receiver should
be kept with the user and turned on.
The use of switch S1 depends upon the
user, and it can be employed to protect
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram of the cordless security system. ones valuables in several ways, thus
Fig. 3: PCB layout of the cordless security system.
Fig. 4: Component layout of the cordless security system.
providing flexibility of use. circuit? RF amplifier unit. But this is not de-
Readers Comments: sired as high power transmitters need
I want the author to clear the following The author, Pradip Kumar Bose, replies: licence.
doubts: Regarding the letter of Mr 2. The transmitter itself can be
1. What modifications are needed Ramanan, I would like to make the used as voice transmitter by simple
to extend the range of the system up to following comments: modifications. The frequency of the cir-
1 kilometre? 1. The range of the transmitter can cuit can also be changed by the tuning
2. How to modify the transmitter be increased by using a high power circuit.
MICROPROCESSOR-BASED
CAPACITANCE AND RESISTANCE
MEASUREMENT METER
VIVEKANANDA K.S. AND ZAMEERUDDIN
T
here are various analogue cir- by the DPDT switch. The displayed RB = 54.17 kilohms are used.
cuits available for the measure value of resistance is in ohms. Instead
ment of capacitance and resis- of wiring the fixed values of resistors Working principle
tance. Here is a microprocessor-based RA and RB and capacitor C, variable
circuit which, instead, displays the re- resistors and capacitors can be used DPDT switch Sl shown in the cir-
sults digitally. to obtain accurate values. In this circuit diagram, when moved to position-
This circuit has an added advan- cuit, a standard-value capacitor C 1, connects the standard resistor RB in
tage over the conventional analogue cir- of value 54.17F and resistors of stan- the circuit. In this condition, if we now
cuits in that both resistance and ca- dard values R A = 53 kilohms and connect a capacitor of any value, the
pacitance can be measured without
making any changes in the circuit con-
figuration. It is this simplicity of dual
operation made possible by the use of
a DPDT switch that makes this project
very appealing and qualifies it as a tech-
nical improvement over the other ana-
logue measurement methods.
Circuit details
The circuit makes use of a timer IC
555, wired as an astable multivibrator.
The output of the timer is fed to the
microprocessor. A DPDT switch is pro-
vided for connecting standard values of
resistors and capacitors to the circuit.
When the capacitance is to be meas-
ured, the standard value of resistor RB
gets connected to the circuit through
the DPDT switch. Now, the capacitance
value is directly proportional to the time
period. This time period is measured
and the capacitor value is calculated
by the microprocessor, which .displays
the reading. Here, the design is such
that the displayed capacitor value is in
nanofarads.
Similarly, when the resistance is to
be measured, the standard value of the
capacitor gets connected to the circuit Fig. 1: Flow chart.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 NE555 timer
D1 1N4001 rectifier diode
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
R1 560-ohm
R2 100-ohm
RA*, RB* (See text)
Capacitors:
C1 0.01 ceramic disc
C* (See text)
Miscellaneous:
S1 DPDT switch
LEDs
P 8085 kit
time period is proportional to the value

of that capacitor (Note that the stan-
dard value of RA has already been con-
nected.) From the time period, the value
of the capacitor can be obtained.
If the switch is now moved to the Fig. 2: Circuit diagram.
other position, the standard capacitor
gets connected to the circuit and the
standard resistor RB gets disconnected.
By placing the resistor whose resis-
tance is to be measured, we can obtain
the value of the resistor as, in this case,
the time period is proportional to the
resistance connected.
We measure resistance or capaci-
tance during the negative half cycle of
the timer output. If we are getting posi-
tive half cycle by the time the micro-
processor connects, we wait till we ob-
Fig. 3: Detection of negative-going edge by the microprocessor.
tain the negative half cycle. On the
other hand, if we get a negative half
cycle by the time the microprocessor is
connected, we wait for the positive half 0.693 RBC, which gives: The counter-number, thus, directly
cycle to pass off and continue waiting n x 37.54 x 10-6 gives the value of the unknown resis-
till the beginning of the next negative C= tance in ohms.
half cycle, as shown in Fig. 2. At the 0.693RB This project, thus, eliminates the
beginning of the negative half cycle, Substituting RB = 54.17 kilohms need for multiplication or division by
the register pair HL resets to 0000. In n x 37.54 x 10-6 any constant terms in the software.
the software, the counter loop starts C=
from the instruction MOV A,L and ends 0.673 x 54.17 x 103 Software
at the instruction JZ AAAA, which So, C = n x l0-9
amounts to a total of 67 T-states. The value of capacitor in nanofarads The software described here is
After completion of the loop once is therefore given by the relation- stored in the EPROM, existing in
again, the microprocessor checks the ship C = n. the microprocessor kit. The count is
status of the pulse, i.e. after (67 x 1/ Thus, the contents of the HL pair stored in the HL pair and register C.
1.785 x 106 = 37.54secs), 1.785 x 106, directly give the capacitor value in The first part of the software
being the microprocessor frequency. nanofarads. synchronises the beginning of the off
At An (Refer Fig. 3), the counter Similarly, for measurement of re- cycle of timer output to the counter
is incremented to n and the total time sistance, program. The counter increments for
period of the negative cycle is n x 37.54 n x 37.54 x 10-6 a period of the off cycle. The de-
secs. R= sign is such that the count directly
For the astable multivibrator, the 0.693 x 54.17 F gives the value of resistance in ohms
time period of the negative cycle is So, R = n and capacitance in nanofarads. The
ADDRESS INSTRUCTION OP-CODE COMMENTS values are directly displayed.
Synchronising program
The circuit is designed to measure
6000 MVI A,82 3E,82 Load accumulator with control word 82 capacitance, ranging from one nF to
6002 OUT CWR D3,OB Output it to Control Word Register 999F and resistance, ranging from ten
XXXX 6004 XRA A AF Set accumulator to zero ohms to one megohm. The port ad-
6005 IN PORT B DB,09 Read data from port B dresses in the software are according
6007 ANI 01 E6,01 Mask bits except D0
6009 CPI 00 FE,00 Compare with zero to the Anshuman 8085 microproces-
600B JZ XXXX CA,04,60 Jump if getting negative pulse to XXXX sor kit.
600E LXI H,0000 21,00,00 Initialise the counter to zero EFY Notes:
6011 MVI C,00 OE,00 Initialise the counter to zero 1. For accurate results, styroflex
YYYY 6013 XRA A AF Clear accumulator
6014 IN PORT B DB,09 Read data from port B
standard capacitor and resistor with
6016 ANI 01 E6,01 Mask bits except D0 least tolerance should be used.
6018 CPI 00 FE,00 Compare with zero 2. The project was tested on an
601A JNZ YYYY C2,13,60 Jump if not getting negative-going 8085 microprocessor training kit, which
edge to YYYY operates at a frequency of 3.07 MHz.
Counter Program
AAAA 601D MOV A,L 7D Transfer contents of L to accumulator Hence, a standard resistor of value,
601E ADI 01 C6,01 Increment the contents RB=31.62 kilohms and capacitor of
6020 DAA 27 Convert to decimal value, C = 31.62 F were used. The
6021 MOV L,A 6F Store back in L port addresses were changed in the soft-
6022 JNZ ZZZZ C2,32,60 Jump if less than 99 to ZZZZ
6025 MOV A,H 7C Transfer contents of H to accumulator
ware accordingly.
6026 ADI 01 C6,01 Increment the contents
6028 DAA 27 Convert to decimal
6029 MOV H,A 67 Store back in H
602A JNZ ZZZZ C2,32,60 Jump if less than 9999 to ZZZZ.
602D MOV A,C 79 Transfer the contehts of C to accumulator
602E ADI 01 C6,01 Increment the content
6030 DAA 27 Convert to decimal
6031 MOV C,A 4F Store back in C
ZZZZ 6032 XRA A AF Clear accumulator
6033 IN PORT B DB,09 Read data from port B
6035 ANI 01 E6M01 Mask bits except D0
6037 CPI 00 FE,00 Compare with 00
6039 JZ AAAA CA,1D,60 If not over, continue the process
Display program
603C Push H E5 Store the contents of H
603D Push B C5 Store the contents of B
603E MOV A,C 79 Transfer the contents of C in A
603F CALL DISA DT CD,E8,02 Call display routine
6042 LXI D FFFF 11,FF,FF Fill the DE pair with counter
6045 CALL DELAY CD,C7,06 Call delay routine
6048 CALL DELAY CD,C7,06 Call delay routine
603B POP B C1 Restore BC pair
604C POP H E1 Restore HL pair
604D JMP 6000 C3,00,60 Jump to start for next measurements
BFO FOR RECEIVING
SSB SIGNALS
P. R. VAIDYANATHAN
M
ost amateur radio stations
are now using single side-
band (SSB) equipment for
the very simple reason that it is much
more effective vis-a-vis AM. Almost
all the commercially available equip-
ment are also basically SSB type.
Different receiver
capabilities
An ordinary radio receiver intended
for broadcast reception is inadequate
to receive SSB or CW, and this poses a
really major problem to the SWLs
(shortwave listeners) in copying ama-
teur stations. If supplemented by a BFO
(beat frequency oscillator), an ordinary
BC (broadcast) receiver can be effec- Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the BFO.
tively used to receive CW and SSB
signals within the bandwidth limita-
tions of such receivers.
sistor Tl works as a Colpitts crystal PARTS LIST
Let us have a brief review of a com-
oscillator and T2 as a buffer amplifier Semiconductors:
munication receiver, compared to an
(for those who wish to drive a product T1 BC147 npn transistor
ordinary BC receiver (see Table). T2 BC148 npn transistor
detector). As such, there is no product
From the Comparison Table, we can
detector in the circuit. The 455kHz RF
notice that, apart from adding a BFO/ Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless
energy radiated from the BFO gets stated otherwise):
product detector, if we make an effort
mixed at the IF/detector stage and both R1 47-kilohm
to have a stable VFO-type local oscil-
the SSB and CW signals get effectively R2 27-kilohm
lator and employ a slow tuning rate, R3 100-ohm
resolved.
the performance of a BC receiver can R4,R7 1-kilohm
It is better to use a 455kHz quartz R5 22-kilohm
be greatly enhanced. Limiting the IF
crystal, if available. A cheaper, but ef- R6 18-kilohm
bandwidths to around 6 kHz can also
fective, substitute will be one of those R8 560-ohm
be achieved by using cascaded IFTs in
ceramic crystals (resonators) available
both the stages of IF amplification. Capacitors:
in the market for less than ten rupees.
This article, however, describes C1 180pF styroflex
Ceramic IF filters could also be sub- C2 2000pF styroflex
only the construction of a BFO, to be
stituted in place of the crystal. If quartz C3 820pF styroflex
used with a BC receiver. The BFO PCB
crystals or ceramic resonators are not C4,C7 0.01F ceramic disc
can either be fitted inside the receiver C5 150pF ceramic disc
available, one can safely substitute an
or it can be made an outboard unit. C6 0.05F ceramic disc
ordinary IFT (primary only) as well.
Equipment required The circuit will oscillate perfectly. Miscellaneous:
A problem with using an IFT is that XTL 455kHz crystal
The circuit is self-explanatory. Tran- the stability of frequency is much less, S1 On/Off switch
tions where the different stations are
tuned in.
When a station is correctly tuned, it
should be possible to take an exact zero
beat. (Zero beat is a term familiar to
most hams.) The unit is now ready for
use.
Testing the unit

Fig. 2: Actual-size PCB layout for the Now, keep the BFO switch in Off Fig. 3: Actual-size compoment
BFO position and tune in an amateur SSB layout for the BFO
station. When you hear the characteris-
compared to the crystal/resonator os- tic SSB monkey talk, switch on the ceiver, the extent of injection can be
cillator. BFO and adjust the main tuning of the controlled by selecting a proper posi-
The example of 455kHz IF has been receiver carefully till you hear the natu- tion for the PCB inside the receiver.
chosen because most BC receivers work ral voice of the person operating the If an enhancement of the BFO signal
at that frequency. But variants are also station. is required, a piece of wire could be
available, e.g. 462 kHz, 467 kHz, etc. Try this with strong SSB stations soldered to the output terminal of the
So, before attempting to build a BFO, BFO board and kept near the receiver
make sure of the intermediate frequency IFT area.
of the receiver and only then buy the If supplemented by a BFO The whole project can be completed
appropriate crystal/resonator. (beat frequency oscillator), an in a few hours, provided you have all
If it is intended as an outboard unit, a ordinary broadcast receiver can be the components ready. Last, but not the
small plastic eliminator box can accom- effectively used to receive CW and least, it must be mentioned that the
modate the PCB. Power supply to the SSB signals within the bandwidth prerequisite for using the BFO is the
BFO could be from a set of four pen-torch limitations of such receivers. stability of the local oscillator in your
batteries, or it can be availed from the receiver. Should the LO be not suffi-
receivers main power supply. ciently stable, a slight retuning may be
The current consumption of the also. If you experience a little diffi- needed from time to time when listen-
BFO is less than 5 mA. The outboard culty in resolving the signal, keep the ing to long QSOs.
unit can be provided with a short piece outboard unit slightly closer. A few
of stiff wire (or a short telescopic an- hours of practice will be enough for Mechanism of SSB
tenna) to radiate the IF energy, and the you to use the gadget effectively. The reception
whole unit can be located at a conve- unit built by the author (installed in-
nient distance from the receiver. side a home-constructed receiver) poses Single-side band, as the name indi-
cates, contains only one side band of
Process of fabrication If your receiver IF frequency is
the modulated carrier. When the car-
rier is modulated with an audio sig-
matched with the BFO frequency,
One important point to be consid- nal, the resultant output is a complex
you will hear a hzzz... sound in the
ered in assembly is that if a ceramic waveform which can be resolved into
receiver. When an AM broadcast
resonator is used in the circuit, the legs three components, viz, the upper side
station is tuned in, there will be
of the resonator may be protected by a band, lower side band and the carrier
pronounced howling (beat note)
long-nosed plier, while soldering. Even itself.
heard in the receiver. When a
a slight amount of heating of the legs Of these, the frequencies of the up-
station is correctly tuned, it should
may damage the resonator. The use of per and lower side bands vary with the
be possible to take an exact zero
a suitable socket may be ideal. frequency of the modulating audio sig-
beat. The unit is now ready for use
After assembly, check for any omis- nal. Thus, if F is the carrier frequency
sions or mistakes and switch on the and f is the audio modulating fre-
DC power. If you have a DC mA meter, no problem in receiving both weak and quency, the upper and lower side bands
check for a current consumption of strong SSB stations. will have frequencies F+f and F-f
around 4 mA. The circuit should be Insufficient injection of BFO en- respectively.
oscillating. ergy indicates itself as a weak howling In a side-band transmitter, only one
If your receiver IF frequency is and excess of injection apparently pulls selected side band is transmittedei-
matched with the BFO frequency, you down the received station due to strong ther the upper or the lower side band.
will hear a hzzz... sound in the re- AGC action. The opposite side band and carrier are
ceiver. When an AM broadcast station If an outboard unit is constructed, suppressed.
is tuned in, there will be pronounced keep the unit at a convenient position At the receiving end, the side-band
howling (beat note) heard in the re- away from the receiver to get the right signal by itself gives no information
ceiver. The howling will be heard all amount of BFO injection. on the audio modulating frequency,
along the dial on all bands at all loca- For units installed inside the re- because of the absence of the refer-
No. Communication Receiver BC Receiver Advantages of SSB
1. NarrowIF bandwidth Relatively large IF bandwidth
transmission
(typically 2.3kHz) (typically 10kHz)
2. Employs RF amplifier front No RF amplifier in majority of cases. Sensi- It is calculated that for 100 per cent
end and hence, highly sensitive tivity is adequate for BC reception only modulation of the carrier, 50 per cent
3. Local oscillator(s) are carefully Separate local oscillators are absent in most power goes on the upper and lower
made VFOs and hence, cases (oscillating converters are used in the side bands together, and the balance 50
drift-free front end) and hence, frequency stability is
poor
per cent on the carrier itself. Hence,
4. Employs product detectors for Uses only AM envelope detector while transmitting 100W of RF power,
reception of SSB and CW signals 50W goes on carrier (F) and 25 W on
5. Effective AGC circuits are Simple AVC circuits are used each side band.
employed As the audio (information) is carri-
6. Frequency coverage per band is very Frequency coverage per band is relatively
much limited and tuning rate is slow very large and turning rate is high ed in the side bands, the useful part of
the signal is the side bands only. Any
single side band will suffice to retrieve
the audio. The carrier frequency (F) in
ence carrier F. When detected in a pling to BFO signals at different IF which 50 per cent power is dumped is
conventional AM diode detector, an stages and detector stage. used only for reference at the receiving
SSB signal results in characteristic The reference carrier can also be end, which is considered to be waste-
monkey talk. reintroduced at the input stage at the ful of energy.
To make this gibberish intelligible, received frequency, instead of at the Hence, if the carrier and one of the
the SSB signal has to be detected in a IF 1evel in a superhet receiver. Rein- sidebands are suppressed and only one
product detector where the missing ref- troducing the reference carrier at the side band is transmitted, the entire
erence carrier (F) is mixed with the operating frequency itself will call for transmitter power can go on a single
SSB signals to retrieve the audio modu- a change of frequency of the refer- side band.
lating frequency f. The purpose of ence carrier for each station received. For a 100W transmitter, the full
the BFO is to generate this reference IF being a fixed frequency, it is only 100W are available for one side band in
carrier locally. necessary to generate the reference the SSB transmitter, whereas only 25W
It is found in practice that a mixer- carrier at one single frequency (equal were available in an AM transmitter.
type product detector is not really a to intermediate frequency), irrespec- Hence, the SSB transmitter is consid-
must. Receivers with AM detectors also tive of the frequency of station re- ered to be as effective as an equivalent
resolve SSB signals through stray cou- ceived. AM transmitter with 400W power.
SAFETY INDICATORS AND AIDS
A.B. TIWANA
W
hile dealing with electrical ing live, interchanging of the live and used to indicate that the operator may
equipment, be it for neutral wires, earth disconnection, recieve an electric shock if the cabinet
industrial or domestic pur- mains leakage, or at times even due to is touched. Circuits for shock warning
poses, safety against fire and shock haz- the blowing of an improperly con- indicators, using neons, LEDs, flash-
ards is of utmost importance. For de- nected fuse. Hence, protection can be ing neons, are given in Figs 1(a), 1(b)
tection of and protection against both ensured by detection of the above faults and 1(c). The resistor values are for
shock and fire hazards, numerous add- and then either manually or automati- 220V mains, and may be appropriately
on circuits, which can easily be incor- cally disconnecting the supply line. In- reduced for 117V operation (in some
porated in the equipment, are described most cases, audio or visual indicators countries).
here. These are designed to protect both serve the purpose and automatic
the operators and the equipment. disconnectors need to be used only in Blown-fuse indicators
certain cases.
Detection and protection Blown-fuse indicators are used to
Shock warning indicators indicate a blown fuse. The circuits
The most common causes of shocks shown in Figs 2(a) and 2(b) give visual
are in the event of the cabinet becom- Shock warning indicators can be and audio indications of a blown fuse.
Fig. 1(a): Safety indicator using neon. Fig. 1(c): Safety indicator using flashing neon.
Fig 1(b): Safety indicator using LED. Fig. 2(a): Visual indicator of a blown fuse.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1,IC2 NE555N timer
IC3 LM709/A741
IC4 LM748 op-amp
IC5 7912 regulator chip
Tl BEL187 pnp transistor
T2, T4, T6 BC147B npn transistor
T3,T7 BC158 pnp transistor
T5 SL100B npn transistor
D1-D3, D5-D11 1N4001 rectifier diode
D4 5.1 V zener diode
Resistors(all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
Rl, R4, R10 820-kilohm
Fig. 2(b): Audio indicator of a blown fuse. R2 22-kilohm,2W
R3 1.8 megohm
R5, R13, R28 100-kilohm
R6,R16,R21,R36 1-kilohm
R7, R27 1-megohm
R8,R12,R19,
R20, R32, R33 10-kilohm
R9 47-kilohm,5W
Rll 22-kilohm
R14 150-ohm
VR15 680-ohm
R17,R18,R22 10-kilohm (thermistor)
R23 10-megohm
R24 220-ohm
R25 12-kilohm
Fig. 3: Earth disconnection alarm with visual indicator. R26 180-kilohm
R27 1-ohm, 10W
R30 8.2-kilohm
R31 820-ohm
R34 1.2-kilohm
R35 4.7-kilohm
VR 1 ,VR3-VRS 10-kilohm presets
VR2.VR6 100-kilohm presets
Capacitors:
C1, C2 22F, 25V electrolytic
C3 1F, 250V tantalum
C4, C7 0.1F ceramic disc
C5 47-F, 25V electrolytic
C6, C14 220F, 16V electrolytic
C9 1000F, 25V eictrolytic
C12 2.2F, 10V electrolytic
Fig. 4(a): Polarity reversal cutout with alarm.
Miscellaneous:
RL1 230V, 10mA relay
RL2 9V or 6V, 300mA relay
RL3 9V, 300 mA relay
RL4 12V, 300-ohm relay
VK27CT piezo buzzer
Piezo buzzer (1PB27B)
230V AC piezo buzzer
230V AC bell
8-ohm loudspeaker
Neon lamps
Fuse wire etc
LEDs
Fig. 4(b): Audio-visual polarity reversal alarm.
Earth disconnection
indicator
The safety system of a device be-
comes ineffective if the earth line of
the device is disconnected. The circuit
shown in Fig. 3 indicates disconnec-
tion of the earth wire, by lighting up a
neon lamp. The neon lamp can easily
be replaced by a nixie tube.
Fig. 5(a): Visual overheating alarm.
Polarity reversal indicators
The interchanging of the neutral and
the live wires can pose a major threat,
as it brings the cabinet close to the
live line potential. The circuit given
in Fig. 4(a) is designed to give an alarm
and disconnect the mains, should such
a situation occur. The circuit given in
Fig. 4(b) gives both an audible and
visual alarm without taking any action.
Overheating/
fire-hazard alarms
The circuits shown in Fig. 5 are
designed to forewarn of any chances of
Fig. 5(b): Audible overheating alarm. fire in sensitive equipment. The cir-
cuits, which can be clipped onto the
power component which tends to heat
the most, say a power transistor or an
IC, gives an alarm when the component
heats up to a preset level. The circuits
given in Figs 5(a), 5(b) and 5(c) give
visual and audio indications respec-
tively and disconnect the supply.
Mains Leakage
Mains leakage is the cause of
electrocution in a majority of cases.
Two circuits are given to detect and
Fig. 5(c): Overheating cutout circuit.
Fig. 6: Mains leakage alarm circuit.
Fig. 7: Mains leakage cutout circuit.
Fig. 8: Electronic variable 'blowing speed' fuse.
provide protection against the same. is based on an LM748 comparator. VR5 ground, if possible. It is recommended
The circuit given in Fig. 6, provides is used to adjust the current level and that one stands on a rubber or wooden
an alarm upon sensing the leakage, VR6 to vary the speed of blowing in block while handling high voltages.
whereas the circuit given in Fig. 7 the seconds range. At least, the left leg should be kept
cuts off the supply in that case. well insulated.
Essential precautions 5. Keep a neon pen tester handy.
Electronic fuses 6. Never try repairing gadgets with
1. Use only the right hand while the mains plug connected. Persons with
In most cases, conventional fuses handling high voltages, so that even weak hearts or heart problems are ad-
can provide protection against various during momentary accidental contact, vised not to risk handling high volt-
hazards. But in certain instances, where the chances of cardiac muscular ages, as they are the most susceptible
the load consumes more current during contraction are reduced. to cardiac arrest.
switch-on but lesser afterwards, the 2. Keep the hands dry while han- Keeping these precautions in mind,
fuse blows up when the device is turned dling voltages even above 50V. even a beginner should be able to con-
on. In such cases, the electronic fuse 3. It is advisable to wear rubber struct the useful safety gadgets, de-
with an adjustable blowing speed may gloves while handling high voltages. scribed above.
be used. The fuse, as shown in Fig. 8, 4. Try to avoid direct contact with
PORTABLE SMD
SOLDERING STATION
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
S
urface mount technology stand the fast, advanced and small mounted devices have revolutionised
(SMT) was introduced in the components in micro electronics. To- the electronics industry.
beginning of the 1980s to make day, almost all components in the com- An SMD is a very small electronic
circuits compact and small. It was puter industry are surface mounted. component. It may be an IC, a resis-
SMD (surface mounted device) which Hence, modern electronic equipment tor a capacitor or a diode. Generally,
created different layer PCBs to with- is very compact and small. Surface ICs are labelled as SMDs when they
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the portable SMD soldering station.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 LM3914N bargraph display
Tl BC148 npn transistor
T2,T3 SL100 npn transistor
T4 2N3055 npn transistor
(on 3mm thick heatsink)
D5 8.6V, l00mW zener
D6 1N4001 rectifier diode
D7 6.1V, 400mW zener
D8 1N4148 silicon switching
diode
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
Rl 560-ohm
R2 100-ohm
R3,R7,R8 8.2-kilohm
R4,R6 2.2-kilohm
R5 1.5-kilohm
R9 3.9-kilohm
R10,R11 1-kilohm
Fig. 2: Actual-size PCB layout for the portable SMD soldering station. VR1 22-kilohm pot
VR2 2.2-kilohm pot
VR3 4.7-kilohm linear pot
Capacitors:
Cl 1000F, 25V electrolytic
Miscellaneous:
RL1 12V, 300-ohm SPDT relay
Sl ON/OFF switch
X1 0-12V, 2A step-down
transformer
Fl 1.5A fuse
12V, 10W/15W SMD iron
LEDs
such cost-effective equipment.
The circuit
Transformer X1 steps down AC
supply voltage. After filtering and recti-
Fig. 3: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 2. fication, the voltage is applied across
an over voltage cutout (OVC) circuit,
are very small and have several ter- (10/15W) soldering iron is necessary built around transistors Tl and T2. Af-
minals. Nowadays, single-chip for SMDs. As it would be very compli- ter a predetermined voltage set by VR1,
m i c r o c o n t r o - cated to use a temperature sensor, a zener D5 fires and transistor Tl con-
llers in keyboards, FDC, XT/AT I/O, variable voltage source is used to conducts. As a result, its emitter voltage
display cards and other add-on cards trol temperature of iron tip. Since ther- increases, T2 becomes on and
are almost all SMDs. Modern elec- mal load is very small for SMDs, this energises relay RL1. At the same time,
tronic wave soldering assembly is used method is suitable. Besides, an over- LED2 indicates over voltage. Relay
to solder these devices on PCBs. But voltage sensor is there to monitor the RL1 breaks the supply to the regulator.
for servicing purpose an SMD solder- mains voltage. If voltage increases The voltage regulation is achieved
ing station is necessary. A com- largely, this section disconnects the iron by a series regulator. Transistors T3
mercially available station costs from the supply to avoid damage to the and T4 are connected in Darlington ar-
around Rs 700 while the station de- element. rangement. The base voltage of tran-
scribed here costs around Rs 400 and A virtual indication of temperature sistor T3 is controlled by VR3. Zener
it can do all the work, the one avail- by several LEDs is used here. The LEDs D7 makes voltage across VR3 constant.
able in the market can do. glow like a bargraph in audio amplifier The variable voltage source is capable
The soldering station is nothing but according to the rise in voltage, i.e. the of giving 9 to 12V DC at 1A.
a temperature controlled soldering iron. rise in temperature. Though this is a IC LM3914N is used here for vir-
A low voltage (12V) and low wattage virtual method, it is quite suitable for tual temperature indication. The volt-
age divider, made by resistors R8, VR2 lay switch from any
and R9, gives sensor voltage to LM one end of coil L1.
3914. This sensor voltage is applied at Now, switch on Sl,
the input terminal of ICl (pin 5). Ten observe and ensure
outputs are taken from IC1 and ten that LED1 is glowing.
LEDs are connected to them, forming Apply about 250V to
a bargraph array. The voltage variation the primary of X1.
across the soldering iron increases or Now, adjust VR1 in
decreases the number of corresponding such a way that relay
LEDs that glow. RL1 just energises. In
SMD iron used here is a 12V, 10W this state, LED1
or 15W soldering iron. These irons are should go off and
small and have a pin-type tip. Besides, LED2 must glow.
a thin solder wire should be used. These Check voltage across Fig. 4: Suggested cabinet for the SMD soldering station.
irons are now available in the market capacitor Cl. It must
for around Rs 140. be higher than 16V in this state. to maximum position. All LEDs should
Decrease primary voltage to 220V. glow. The soldering station is ready for
Construction, testing Relay RL1 should de-energise now. use now. A suggested cabinet is shown
and alignment Connect coil L1 in its place and adjust in Fig. 4.
VR3 to get minimum output voltage. To begin with, place VR3 to 3/4th
The PCB layout and component lay- Check this voltage with a meter. If it is of its total rotation and then after heat-
out of this project are shown in Figs 2 below 9V, replace resistor R7 by trial ing place it near 1/2 position. This
and 3, respectively. and error method. will increase the life of iron as well
Use IC socket for IC 3914. After In this condition, adjust VR2 such as the bit.
completing construction, disconnect re- that LED3 just glows. Now, rotate VR3
Readers Comments: cation of the resistor. Please, clarify are in parallel, but current through them
Please, correct some mistakes in the the wattage of resistor. Why are we is unequal. Resistor R1 dissipates
article: using such low-value resistor? Is it a around 0.25W (IR1) = 0.021A approx.)
Resistors R1 (560-ohm) and R5 bleeder resistor? and R5 dissipates 0.096W. However,
(1.5k) have been connected in paral- Ramesh Hirpara R1s rating may be changed to 0.5-
lel to each other across rectified volt- Gandhinagar watt, if required. Yes, R1 and R2 are
age filtering capacitor C1. With 12V bleeder resistors.
DC, the flow of around 30mA cur- The author, Pradip Kumar Bose,
rent disspates about 360mW across replies:
R1, which exceeds the 1/4W specifi- Please, note that the two resistors
DIGITAL CONTROLLER FOR
OUTDOOR LIGHTS
UNNIKRISHNAN P.R.
T
here is a variety of outdoor light on IC1, an NE555. A fixed voltage, stays high as long as its trigger input
controllers available. Some lower than 2/3 Vcc, is fed to pin 6 stays below 1/3 Vcc.
switch lights on at the fall of (threshold) of IC1. If triggered, its out- At night, the resistance of LDR1 is
dusk and off at the break of dawn. Oth- put stays in the on state as long as its high, so the voltage at pin 2 is at a low
ers switch lights on at the end of dusk reset pin 4 does not get a negative pulse level and hence the output of IC2 goes
and off after a few hours. But for do- or the power supply is interrupted. The high at night. The output condition of
mestic use, where we require light in output goes low when the supply is IC2 can be detected from LED2. The
the early mornings also, these do not switched on again. The output of IC1 output of IC2 gives power supply to
serve the purpose. The circuit described provides power supply for the second the next three stages.
here solves this problem. section.
It offers the following features: By pressing Sl, a negative pulse is 3. Resetting
1. It switches on lights at about 6.00 fed to pin 2, and thus it can be used to The next section is used to reset
pm and switches off at about switch on the other sections. S2 is used the two 4017 decade counter ICs used
10.30 pm. Again, it switches on lights to switch off other sections by reset- in the counter section. This is also
at 4.30 am and switches off at about ting IC1. based on a 555 timer (IC3). Its trig-
6.00 am. When power supply is interrupted, ger pin 2 is connected to capacitor
2. If power supply is interrupted, it output of IC1 goes low and switches C4 and resistor R7. In the absence of
automatically switches off the whole off the other sections. When power sup- a supply, there is no voltage across
system. In this way, erratic switching ply is resumed, S1 must be pressed to the capacitor. When supply is on, IC3
of the bulbs is avoided. switch on the circuit. By observing is triggered because voltage across ca-
3. There are separate on and off LED1, we can know whether the cir- pacitor is below 1/3 Vcc and its out-
switches for easy operation of the sys- cuit is on or off. put goes to a high state. The voltage
tem. across capacitor C4 increases, so that
4. It uses LED indicators to detect 2. Triggering the voltage at pin 2 crosses 1/3 Vcc.
different conditions of the circuit. This section is used to trigger the The time period for which the output
5. Preset control to set the trigger circuit at the fall of dusk. It is config- stays in the high state depends upon
time. ured around IC2, which is working in resistor R8 and capacitor C5, and is
The circuit comprises six sections. the monostable mode. A variable volt- given by the relationship 1.1 x R8 x
age is fed to trigger pin 2 of IC2 via C5.
1. Autopower off LDR1 and VR1. In the monostable The output of IC3 is given to the
The autopower off system is based mode of operation, the output of IC2 reset pin 15 of decade counters IC5
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the digital controller.
Fig.2: Circuit diagram for the digital controller.
and IC6. These ICs are reset when IC3 6. Output vated.
is triggered, and as long as the output The output section is used to switch
of IC3 is in the high state, the counters the relay on and off. It is based on Working
stay in the reset position. BEL187 transistor Tl. The relay is con-
nected at the collector of transistor Tl. By pressing S1, the triggering sec-
4. Oscillator Diode D5 is connected to protect tran- tion gets the power supply. At the fall
This section is used to produce a sistor T1. The output from the count- of dusk, the resistance of LDR1 in-
square wave output. It is based on ing section is fed to the base of T1 creases, so a large voltage is dropped
IC4, an NE555. Its output frequency through resistor Rl1. If the output from across it, resulting in a decrease in the
depends upon resistors R9, R10 and counting section is high, it biases the voltage at pin 2.
capacitor C7, and is calculated by the transistor and thus the relay is acti- When the voltage at pin 2 drops
equation
1.443 PARTS LIST
Semiconductors: Capacitors:
(R9 + 2 R10) C7 IC1 - IC4 NE555 timer Cl,C3,C6, C8 0.0lF ceramic
The output frequency is fed to the IC5, IC6 CD4017B decade disc
counter C2 100, 16V
counter section. T1 BEL187 npn electrolytic
transistor C4 47nF ceramic
5. Counting D1 - D5 1N4001 rectifier C5 470F, 16V
The counter section is used to count dicode electrolytic
the output frequency from the oscillat- Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless
C7 l000F,16V
ing section. It uses two CMOS stated otherwise): electrolytic
CD4017BS ICs. The frequency from Rl, R13 10-kilohm C9 l00F,25V
oscillating section, IC4, is fed to the R2 56-kilohm electrolytic
input pin of IC5. IC5 works as a fre- R3 27-kilohm Cl0 10F,16V
R4, R6, R12, R14 680-ohm electrolytic
quency divider and its output is fed to R5 100-kilohm
the input pin of IC6. R7 2.2-megohm Miscellaneous:
The four outputs of IC6 are com- R8 470-kilohm RL1 9V, 200-ohm,
bined by using diodes D1 through D4. R9 120-kilohm SPST relay
RI0 330-kilohm S1,S2 Pushbutton type
This combined output is given to the R11 15-kilohm switch
last section. If any of the outputs is VR1 470-kilohm,
high, then the load is in on state. variable
The condition of this combined out- LDR1 Light dependent
put is detected by LED3. resistor
Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the digital controller.
Fig. 5: Front panel layout.
on. After one and a half hour, the

output is changed to Q8 (pin 9).
Since pin 9 of IC6 has no connec-
tion, it again switches off the relay.
At the break of dawn, the re-
sistance of LDR1 decreases, and
the trigger pin of IC2 gets a posi-
tive voltage greater than 1/3 Vcc,
so that its output goes low which,
in turn, cuts off power supply to
the next three stages.
Assembly
The circuit may be assembled
on a general-purpose PCB or the
PCB whose pattern is shown in
Fig. 3. Front panel can be made
Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3. according to ones choice. A model
is shown in Fig. 5.
below 1/3 Vcc, IC2 is triggered and about nine minutes. Since IC5 divides A 9V power supply can be as-
stays in the high state till morning. the output frequency from IC4, IC6 sembled, using a step-down transformer
Since the output of IC2 is high, the gets a pulse of time period 9 x 10 = 90 and a rectifier, and connected to the cir-
next three stages get power supply. minutes, i.e. one and a half hours. So, cuit as shown in Fig. 2. Relay connec-
When C4 is fully charged, IC3 is the outputs of IC6 are changed every tions are also shown in Fig. 2.
triggered and so the reset pins of IC5 one and a half hours duration. The front panel bears various con-
and IC6 both get a positive pulse. When the controller is switched on, trols and indication LEDs. In the pres-
Therefore, the first outputs of both ICs the output Q0 at pin 3 of IC6 is high ence of power, LED1 glows. On press-
are high. This condition changes when and it turns on the load for first one ing S1, LED4 will glow.
the voltage across capacitor C5 crosses and a half hour. Then, the next output At day time, adjust VR1 to set the
2/3 Vcc, because then the output of Q1 at pin 2 is high, which switches on trigger LED2 to off position by trial
IC3 goes to a low state and the reset the load for the second one and a half and error method.
pins of IC5 and IC6 get a negative hour. Next, output Q2 at pin 4 goes Under normal conditions, only
pulse each. In this condition, IC5 gets high, which switches on the load for LED1 and LED4 will glow. After dusk,
ready to accept pulses from the oscil- the same period again. trigger LED2 and load LED3 will also
lating section and its outputs are When the output Q3 at pin 7 is glow. After four and a half hours, the
changed. high, it switches off the relay as pin 7 load and load LED3 are off. The load
For each set of ten pulses from IC4, has no connection. Then, the output of LED3 is again activated after six hours,
the outputs of IC6 are changed one by IC6 changes to Q4, Q5, Q6 for each to be turned off after another one and a
one. The output time period of oscillat- one and a half hour, and when it reaches half hours.
ing section is about 540.5 seconds, i.e. Q7 (i.e. pin 6) the load is again switched To turn the system off, press S2.
VOX FOR HAM RIGS
KANG K.P.S
V
OX or voice operated trans-
receive control is very conve-
nient in operating a transmit-
ter, especially in SSB mode. Commer-
cially available units are expensive.
Most of the available circuits in Ham
journals use complex circuitry, which
either is highly expensive or most of
the components are not easily avail- Fig. 1: Block diagram for the VOX.
able in the Indian market. The unit de-
scribed here is based on compact and unit is an improvement over the previ- preamplifier is provided with a sensi-
straightforward design, using easily ously available designs. tivity control, which is used to adjust
available discrete devices, and is quite the sensitivity of VOX. The output of
inexpensive. The unit is ideal to use Block diagram the preamplifier is rectified and a DC
with almost any commercial or home- signal proportional to the available mi-
brewed VHF or HF trans-receiver that The block diagram is given in Fig.1. crophone input is applied to VOX/
does not have the facility of VOX op- A part of microphone input is capaci- antivox sensitivity control.
eration. Further, the performance of this tively coupled to a preamplifier. The Antivox signal is derived from re-
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the VOX.
Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the VOX.
ceiver speaker output and is applied to transmitter. The delay circuit provides ceased.
the unit. This signal is also rectified to the required delay to trans-receive
achieve a similar DC signal, but with change-over. Circuit
opposite polarity to that of VOX signal In presence of antivox signal from
and applied to the second arm of VOX/ the receivers speaker, a signal of equal
antivox sensitivity control. but opposite magnitude is developed The input stage to the preamplifier
In presence of VOX signal from across the second arm of VOX/antivox is designed with an FET to achieve
microphone input, a proportional DC sensitivity control, which cancels out high input impedance (around 1-me-
signal is developed at the centre of the trace of VOX signal to DC ampli- gohm) and low current drain. Capaci-
VOX/ antivox sensitivity control, which fier and de-operates the transmitter. tor C2 shunts traces of any RF pickup
is amplified, using a DC amplifier and Thus, in presence of signals in receiver, at the input of this stage since the unit
it operates the relay driver to key the false operations of transmitter are is designed to operate near transmitter/
receiver unit. Resistors Rl, R2 and R3
PARTS LIST bias the FET. The frequency response
of the stage is determined with emitter
Semiconductors: VR3 10-Kilohm pot. decoupling capacitor C6. In case false
Tl BFW10 (FET) transistor VR4 22-Kilohm pot.
T2,T3 BC149C npn transistor
operation due to hum pickup from sur-
T4 BC148B npn transistor Capacitors: rounding mains wiring is observed, it
T5 BC157A pnp transistor Cl 0.005F ceramic disc can be eliminated by reducing the val-
T6 BC147B/SL100 npn C2 220pF ceramic disc ues of capacitors C6 and C9.
transistor C3 270pF ceramic disc Transistors T2 and T3 constitute the
D1-D4 1N34/OA79 detector C4 0.lF ceramic disc
diode C5 2200F, 16V electrolytic next two stages of the preamplifier.
D5 1N4001 rectifier diode C6,C8,C9 4.7F, 16V electrolytic BC149C transistors are used at low Q
C7 3.3F 16V electrolytic points to achieve the required perform-
Resistors (all 1/4 watt +5% carbon, unless C10,C12, ance from the circuitry. The emitter
stated otherwise): C14 10F, 16V electrolytic
Rl 1-Megohm C11,C13 lF nonpolar electrolytic
resistance VR1 of transistor T3 deter-
R2.R6, mines the overall gain of the preampli-
R10,R13 10-Kilohm Miscellaneous: fier and so the microphone sensitivity
R3,R14 1-Kilohm Sl SPST toggle switch can be controlled with it.
R4,R8,R12 100-Kilohm S2 Push-to-on switch Diodes Dl through D4 constitute
R5 270-Kilohm RL1 12V, 600-ohm SPST
R7 820-ohm relay rectifier/detector sections for both VOX
R9 150-Kilohm PCB, connecting wires, and antivox signals. Diode 1N34 is
Rll 4.7-Kilohm suggested enclosure and used, but OA79 or similar germanium
VR1 1-Kilohm jacks etc units will render better service in such
VR2 220-Kilohm
stages, and can be substituted for bet-
ter performance, if available. The rec- transients during relay operations. fier stages, additional safety measures,
tified outputs are filtered with capaci- such as use of high quality shielded
tors C11 and C13 capacitors and Construction wires (especially as small in length as
applied to the two arms of VR2, which possible) should be taken too. It is ad-
is used as VOX/antivox balance. A PCB layout of the VOX unit visable to use ferrite beads on all input
The reverse polarities of diodes is given in Fig.3. The PCB is suffi- and supply leads.
D3 and D4 in antivox section of recti- ciently large and simple for easy No provision of mounting the relay
fier are meant to generate negative assembling, even by beginners. on the PCB itself is made and thus the
magnitude with respect to VOX recti- The PCB accommodates almost all relay needs to be fitted wherever pos-
fier. A positive potential is applied components, except VR3, C13, C14, sible. A fast relay is needed to avoid
to the VOX arm of VOX/antivox bal- D3 and D4 which are mounted clipping of the first syllable spoken. A
ance through switch S2 and resistor near the antivox input jack on the rear small unit is often better than a large
R12 to effectuate manual operation panel. The complete unit may be housed one.
when needed. in a metallic cabinet used The adjustment is simple. Keep
The generated emf is applied to a for TV signal boosters, but can be in- VR2 approximately at its centre. Ad-
DC amplifier, built around transistors cluded in the existing transmitter cir- just VR1, so that the relay is keyed
T4 and T5. Capacitor C12, resistor Rll cuit itself. with each syllable spoken at a consid-
and potentiometer VR4 form the delay The PCB layout shows that about erable and convenient distance from
circuit, which provides the required one third of the space is unused and so the microphone. VR4 should be ad-
time delay between trans-receive op- a smaller version is obviously possible justed to an individuals speech habits,
erations. Transistor T6 is a relay driver. to fit into the commercial rigs with but it is a must to give sufficient delay,
BC147B is used, but BC187 can also crowded inners and a PCB to suit indi- so that the relay should drop out only
be used. Another good substitute is vidual needs can be designed accord- at long pauses in speech. The antivox
SL100 or BD135. An SPST relay at its ingly. control VR3 should be adjusted to give
collector is used to key the transmitter. Though a metallic enclosure is used required antivox action at listening level
Diode D5 protects transistor T6 from to avoid stray RF pickup by preampli- of the receiver of ones choice.
STEADY HAND GAME
HARINDER SINGH
T
his is a game which demands top and a smooth inner surface with As the container s surface is
a lot of concentration and a lightweight ball in it. The objective smooth, it is very difficult to achieve
patience. The mechanical ver- of the game is to manoeuvre the ball this objective. And even if the ball lands
sion of the game consists of a cylindri- into a shallow pit at the bottom of the up in the pit, it is very likely that the
cal container with a transparent flat container. ball would jump out soon, as the pit is
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the steady hand game.
PARTS LIST time, and it is necessary that the balls
Semiconductors:
remain in the pit for quite some time
ICl (a-d) LM324 op-amp (approx. 15 seconds) before the player
IC2 CD4040 counter is declared a winner.
IC3-IC4 NE555 timer
IC5(N1-N4) CD4011 NAND
T1,T2 BC548 npn transistor Circuit description
D1.D2 1N4148 silicon
switching diode The circuit can be divided mainly
into two sections, the display section
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon, unless and the timer section. The display sec-
stated otherwise):
R1,R2,R11,R12 47-kilohm
tion consists of ball LEDs, LED1
R3,R6,R7,R10 through LED4, the ball in the pit, LED5
R13,R21 10-kilohm (bicolour) and the joystick potentiom-
R4,R5,R8,R9, eters VR1 and VR5. IC1 LM324 is an
R14,R15,R22 1-kilohm op-amp. Op-amps IC1 (a) and ICl (b)
R16 680-kilohm
R17 330-kilohm are wired as window comparators.
R18 180-kilohm In a comparator if the non-invert-
R19 100-kilohm ing pin voltage is higher than the in-
R20 4.7-kilohm verting pin voltage, the output is posi-
VR1,VR5 100-kilohm pot. Fig. 3: Construction of joystick plate.
VR2,VR4 220-ohm pot.
tive; if the voltages at both the invert-
VR3 (a,b) 1-kilohm dual pot. ing and non-inverting pins of the com-
parator are same, the output is zero; lighting up of green portion of LED5.
Capacitors : else the output from the comparator is The timer section consists of two
C1,C2,C4 0.1F ceramic disc negative. Window voltage for compara- NE555 timer ICs. When the green por-
C3,C6 100F, 16V
electrolytic tor IC1(a) and ICl(b) can be increased tion of LED5 is extinguished, the reset
C5 0.01F ceramic disc or decreased with the help of potenti- pin 11 of binary counter IC2 CD4040
ometer VR3(a). is held high and hence IC2 is reset.
Miscellaneous : When the voltage at the centre pin When the green portion of LED5 lights
LED1-LED4,
LED5 Bicolour LED
of potentiometer VR1 is within the win- up, pin 11 of IC2 is grounded, so that it
(common-anode) dow voltage limits, both LED1 and starts counting the clock pulses pro-
LED6 Red LED LED2 are extinguished, else if voltage vided to it from IC3. IC3, is wired as
Sl Bell pushbutton at centre pin of VR1 is higher than astable multivibrator and provides
switch voltage at inverting pin of IC1(a), LED1 pulses of length 0.117 seconds. IC2
lights up and LED2 is extinguished. counts these pulses upto 128, i.e. after
very shallow. Another version of the On the other hand, if voltage at the about 15 seconds pin 13 of IC2 will go
game has more than one ball, all of centre pin of VR1 is lower than the high for a period of 0.117 seconds, pro-
which have to be manoeuvered into the voltage at non-inverting pin of IC1(b) vided IC2 is not reset, i.e. the ball does
pit at the same time. then LED2 lights up and LED1 is ex- not jump out of the pit for full
The electronic version of the game, tinguished. Decreasing the window 15 seconds. If the ball does jump out,
taken up here, imitates the mechanical voltage by decreasing resistance of VR3 IC2 is reset and the next count starts
version having two balls. The rolling makes it difficult to achieve the objec- from zero till the time the ball remains
balls are represented by red LEDs and tive of the game as the position of VR1 in the pit.
the ball in the pit is represented by a at which both LED1 and LED2 are IC4 is wired as a timer whose time
green LED. The balls have to be ma- extinguished becomes more precise. is set by potentiometer VR6 and varies
noeuvred into the pit, using a joystick. VR1 is used to manoeuvre the ball, from 20 to 130 seconds. Switch Sl is
To increase the excitement, timers have i.e. LED1 and LED2 in two opposite used to start the timer. As soon as S1 is
been included. The balls have to be directions, east and west. A similar cir- pressed, pin 3 of IC4 goes high and
manouvred into the pit within a preset cuit is built around comparators IC1(c) LED7 is extinguished. If during this
and ICl(d), and VR5 manoeuvres time, when pin 3 of IC3 is high, the
the ball, i.e. LED3 and LED4, in ball remains in the pit for 15 seconds,
north-south direction. i.e. pin 13 of IC2 is high, the output of
When any of the four ball NAND gate N3 goes low, thus turning
LEDs is lit, transistor Tl con- on the red portion of LED5. A latch is
ducts, so that transistor T2 is cut formed around NAND gates Nl and
off and the green colour part of N2. The latch is activated as soon as
FOLD HERE bicolour LED5 does not light, the output of gate N3 goes low, so that
TO MAKE 90
O
ANGLE BETWEEN
indicating that the ball is not in the red portion of LED5 lights on. Now,
THE TWO SIDES the pit. As soon as all the ball if the ball jumps out of the pit, green
LEDs are extinguished, Tl stops portion of LED5 will get extinguished,
conducting. Hence, T2 conducts but red portion remains lit, indicating
Fig. 2: Arrangement of joystick elevation. via resistor R13, resulting in victory.
If the player is unable to achieve is screwed to the plate after removing moved easily. Using a commercial ball
the objective of the game within the its original spindle. The spindle of VR1 type joystick will make the game
given time, LED7 is lit, indicating time- is then placed in place of its original slightly more difficult, since the mo-
out. The red portion of LED5 will not spindle and glued to it, so that the tion of joystick handle in slightly slant-
light up even by placing the ball in the spindle of VR1 moves, on moving the ing direction results in movement of
pit for 15 seconds if LED7 is lit, as the plate. spindles of both VR1 and VR5.
condition for low output from gate N3 The second potentiometer VR5 is
will not be fulfilled in that case. screwed to the other hole in the plate Alignment and operation
and its spindle is glued to a handle
Construction formed by the back portion of an old The only adjustments that have to
ball pen. Now, the handle can be moved be made are in the presets VR2 and
As the circuit is simple, it can easily in two directions perpendicular to each VR4. Keep the resistance of potenti-
be constructed on a general-purpose other, thus changing the resistance of ometer VR3 minimum and adjust the
PCB. All the LEDs, potentiometers VR3 potentiometers VR1 and VR5, depend- joystick, so that all the red LEDs are
and VR6 and the joystick are mounted ing on the direction of motion. extinguished. If two opposite direction
on the front panel. To keep the cost of Before placing the joystick in the LEDs (1 and 2 or 3 and 4) are lit
the game low, it is advisable to con- casing, make sure that wipers of both simultaneously, increase the resistance
struct your own joystick. the potentiometers VR1 and VR5 are of VR2 (for LED1 and LED2) or VR4
Detailed diagrams, showing the midway, when the handle is almost (for LED3 and LED4) until only one
construction of a simple joystick, are perpendicular to the panel. of the two opposite-direction LEDs is
given in Figs. 2 and 3. This joystick This arrangement is screwed to the lit, as the ball can only be in one of
will have two degrees of motion along panel, so that only the handle of the the two opposite directions at an in-
two axes. VR1 is connected to the plate joystick is outside the casing. The hole stant.
by using the spindle holder of a dam- meant for the joystick handle should Potentiometer VR6 may be adjusted
aged potentiometer, having same be somewhat larger in dia than the dia to give the required delay time to
spindle dia as VR1. This spindle holder of the handle, so that the handle can be achieve the objective of the game.
TELECONVERSATION LIMITER
S.BATRA
G Circuit description
ossiping over the telephone, Under on-hook condition, the line
especially among youngsters, voltage, i.e. 48V, enables zener to break
has become a very common The complete circuit diagram of the down. Hence, a voltage of 15V devel-
trait nowadays. The verbal instruction gadget is given in Fig. 2. Under the ops across the zener and about 33V
to be brief on phone, hardly has any idle condition, i.e. when the telephone drops across R18, which is applied to
effect. The electronic gadget discussed is on-hook, the potential difference opto-LED pins 1 and 2 of the
here may force the telephone user to across the telephone line is about 48V. optocoupler IC1(4N35) through 33k
be brief, or else disconnect the line The diodes D1 through D4 in the bridge limiting resistor R17 and the opto-LED
after 9 or 10 minutes. configuration, 15V zener diode D5 and lights up.
100k resistor R18 form the watchdog Under off-hook condition, a loop is
Working principle circuit. The circuit will detect whether extended through the telephone instru-
the telephone is on-hook or off-hook. ment, reducing the line potential to
The principle of the gadget can be
very well understood from the block PARTS LIST
diagram shown in Fig. 1. The gadget
Semiconductors : Capacitors:
consists of a watchdog circuit, sensor IC1 4N35 or MCT2E optocoupler C1,C4 2.2 F, 16V electrolytic
and switch circuit, one-minute pulse IC2 7555 CMOS timer C2 47F, 16V electrolytic
generator, decade counter/divider and IC3 4017 CMOS decade counter C3 0.0 lF ceramic disc
relay circuit. T1,T2 BC109 silicon npn transistor C5 220F, 16V electrolytic
D1-D4 1N4004 rectifier diode C6 l00F, 16V electrolytic
Watchdog circuit/sensor circuit will D5 15V, 250mW zener
detect whether the telephone is in use. Miscellaneous:
If so, it extends the information to the Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon, unless X1 230V AC primary to 0-5V,
switch circuit which in turn supplies stated otherwise): 100 mA secondary trans-
Vcc to one-minute pulse generator/de- R1-R10, former
R14,R15, RL1 5 or 6V mini relay
cade counter. Conversation period is R19 1-kilohm LED1-
counted and displayed by LEDs R11,R12 10-kilohm LED5 3 mm green LED
(LED1LED10). After nine minutes R13 1-megohm LED6-
the relay circuit is enabled to discon- R16,R18 100-kilohm LED8 3 mm amber LED
R17 33-kilohm LED9,
nect the telephone instrument from the VR1 47-kilohm preset LED10 3 mm red LED
line. VR2 470-ohm preset Suitable acrylic cabinet
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the teleconversation limiter.
about 9V. This voltage fails to operate
the 15V zener, and hence no potential
is developed across resistor R18 and
no light is emitted by the opto-LED.
Light energy, if emitted, is sensed
by the photo-transistor pins 4 and 5 of
optocoupler IC1 and in turn drives tran-
sistor Tl to saturation. The potential at
the collector of transistor Tl will there-
fore be almost zero. In case the light is
not sensed, the transistor will be cut
off and the supply potential, about 5V,
will be available at the collector of Tl.
The collector of transistor Tl extends
the reset voltage to pin 4 of one-minute
generator IC2 (7555) and Vcc to de-
cade counter/divider IC3 (4017). Obvi-
ously, when the telephone is on-hook,
transistor Tl supplies zero potential to
both the ICs and they are inactive.
The moment the telephone is off-
hook, supply voltage of about 5V is
extended to IC2 and IC3. Every minute
is counted by the counter and displayed
by the respective LEDs.
The first five minutes are indicated
by five green LEDs, one by one. Subse-
quent three minutes are indicated by
three amber LEDs. The ninth minute is
indicated by a red LED.
In case, the call is not concluded
till the end of the ninth minute, start of
the tenth minute will operate LED 10
and the mini relay circuit, disconnect-
ing the telephone instrument through
N/C contact of the relay.
The watchdog circuit continues get-
ting potential lower than 15V. The ca-
pacitor C4 and resistor R12 help in
resetting IC3 as soon as the telephone
is off-hook. Capacitor C6 provides a
delay of two to three seconds as a
protection against any irregularity due
to tapping of the hook-switch by some-
one. As soon as the telephone is on-
hook, transistor Tl saturates and IC2
and IC3 become inactive.
In case, the time-limit has to be set
to other than nine minutes, vary the
time-period of IC2 by varying the val-
ues of preset VRl, resistor R13 and
capacitor C2.
Assembly and testing

This project can be assembled on a
PCB of about 80 mm x 65mm size.
The PCB and component layouts are
given in Figs 3 and 4, respectively. Af-
ter the assembly is completed, before
connecting it to the telephone line, the Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the teleconversation limiter.
Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
circuit could be tested as follows : rent of the relay. Now, the gadget is when the relay operates, the line will
1. Before switching on the main ready for connection to the telephone be disconnected from the instrument
supply, check for any short circuit be- line. for about a minute. The telephone call
tween Vcc and ground. When switched 6. When connected to the telephone will also get disconnected during this
on, the supply voltage should be be- line, no LED should light up, except one-minute interval.
tween 6 and 7 volts. the power indicator LED 11. In case After the circuit has been satisfacto-
2. With the telephone line not con- under on-hook condition LED1 lights rily tested, the complete gadget can
nected, there will be no potential at the be housed in a suitable white acrylic
base of transistor Tl and about 5V cabinet and installed near the telephone
should be available at the collector of instrument. A suggested front panel lay-
Tl. LED1 will light up. out of the cabinet is shown in
3. After about a minute, LED2 Fig. 5.
should light, if the one-minute pulse Incoming ringing current will have
generator is working properly. If not, no effect on the gadget, as IC2 and IC3
check output pin 3 of IC2 for 50 per- are not active at that time.
cent duty cycle. Otherwise, check the Any other disturbance on the line
components connected to IC2. will not affect the working of the gad-
4. If the counter is working prop- get, as it is completely isolated from
Fig. 5: Suggested acrylic cabinet.
erly, it should light up all the LEDs one the telephone line.
by one. up, check either the optocoupler or In case of any fault (such as failure
5. When the last LED lights up, the transistor Tl. of optocoupler or power supply) in the
relay will operate. Keep preset VR2 at 7. As soon as the instrument is off- gadget, the normal operation of the tele-
the minimum value. Increase VR2 till hook, the first green LED should light phone will not be affected as the tele-
the relay remains in the operating condi- up. Subsequently, all LEDs should light phone instrument continues to be con-
tion. Try to adjust before the tenth LED up one by one. nected to the line through the normally-
goes off. This will economise the cur- 8. After about nine or ten minutes, closed (N/C) contact of the relay.
PROGRAMMABLE NUMBER
LOCK
S. HARI KUMAR
A
programmable versatile elec- tered again. The memory is protected lock, if one finds the 9-digit number
tronic number lock circuit is against power failures, and is not lost a bit too long.
discussed here. It offers facili- even during battery replacement.
ties to set a nine-digit code number for The circuit is built entirely around Operation of the lock
the lock. The code can be changed very CMOS ICs, and hence consumes very
easily by the legitimate user. A number little power under steady state condi- A keyboard is provided to enter the
is entered and the lock is set. The lock tions. With slight modification, a 4- numbers. To set a number in the lock,
opens only if the same number is en- digit number can be used to set the first put switch S3 on, to activate the
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the main programmable number
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the keyboard of programable number lock.
displays. Display 1 shows the number note the value and the position of each entered is correct, the relay operates to
entered, and display 2 the position of digit from the displays. For example, if open the lock. If it is not, the relay is
that number. the number entered is 748326781, when not activated.
Press the reset or retry switch S2 to the digit 2 is entered display 1 will show
initialise the counter and flip-flop. Now, 2 and display 2 will read 5. After the Working
display 2 reads zero. Display 1 also number is set, open switch S1. The
reads zero, as no number is entered. display can be put off by opening switch The number entered at the keyboard
Close switch Sl to enable Write op- S3. Press switch S2 to reset the lock. is converted to BCD form, using the
eration. Now, enter a 9-digit number To open the lock, push switch S2 standard diode encoder matrix shown
through the keyboard, taking care to and enter the number. If the number in Fig. 2. The output of keyboard unit
is fed to the lock control unit. IC2
PARTS LIST MM74C14 is a hex inverter schmitt
Semiconductors: R15,R17, trigger. The resistors and capacitors
IC1 7806 6V, 500mA regulator R18, R20, along with IC2 serve a dual purpose.
IC2 MM74C14 hex inverter R21,R26 They provide the time delays required
schmitt trigger R38 10-kilohm to adjust the pulse timings for IC4 and
IC3 MM74C04 hex inverter R16 22-kilohm
R19,R36 1-kilohm
IC6, and also serve as key debouncer.
IC4 MM74C89 64-bit tristate
random access read/write R22, R23, The output of IC2 goes low when
memory R25 100-kilohm the input voltage reaches the positive
IC5, IC8 CD4511 BCD to 7 segment R24, going threshold VT+ of the IC, and re-
latch decoder/driver R31-R34 2.2-kilohm mains so until the input voltage falls
IC6 MM74C90 4-bit decade R35 4.7-kilohm
counter R37 1.2-kilohm below its negative going threshold VT-.
IC7 MM74C86 quad 2-input IC6 is a decade counter, which
EX-OR gate Capacitors: counts on the negative going edge of
IC9 MM74C32 quad 2-input OR C1 1000F, 25V electrolytic clock pulse. When any key is pressed,
gate C2-C8 0.1F ceramic disc
IC6 is given a clock pulse and it incre-
IC10 MM74C08 quad 2-input
AND gate ments its count.
IC11 MM74C74 dual D-type flip- Miscellaneous: The BCD output from the keyboard
flop S1 SPST switch is inverted by IC2, and is again in-
T1 BC147 npn transistor S2 Push-to-on switch verted by IC3, a 7404 hex inverter, to
T2 SL100 npn transistor S3 SPST switch
D1, D2 S4-S13 Keyboard with 10 keys give the original BCD form to IC4
D32-D36 1N4001 silicon rectifier RL1 6V, 300-ohm relay (MM74C89).
diode X1 230V AC primary to 12V, IC4 is a 64-bit tristate random ac-
D3-D31 1N4148 silicon switching 500mA secondary trans- cess memory. Data is stored in words
diode former
DIS1, DIS2 FND500 or LT543 com-
of 4-bit length and so a maximum of
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless mon cathode display sixteen 4-bit data can be stored. To store
stated otherwise): B1, B2 6V battery (two 3V lithium a 4-bit data in the memory, the data is
R1-R14 370-ohm cells) given to data inputs and the address is
PCB, chassis etc. fed to address inputs. Then CS (chip
Fig. 3: Actual size PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 5: Upper track side layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
select) and WE (write enable) pins 2 By keeping WE low, a number is one of the four bits, one of the outputs
and 3 are brought low. stored in the memory chip. Now WE is of EX-OR gates goes high. All the four
In the read operation, WE is kept kept high. During Read operation, outputs are ORed to get output at pin 8
high and address is given to address when each number is fed through key- of IC9, which is a quad OR gate. A
input. When CS is brought low, the board the corresponding number is read mismatch in numbers results in a logic
data stored at the address location is out from the memory and compared 1 at pin 8 of IC9, which is given to the
available at the output. The address to with the given number using IC7, a D flip-flop, IC11. Resistor R19 and ca-
IC4 is provided by the counter (IC6). quad EX-OR gate. pacitor C9 are used for pulse stretch-
The address is in binary form. If the numbers do not match in any ing. The databit at the input is latched
Fig. 6: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 8: Upper track side layout for the PCB shown in Fig.
to the output at the positive transition low the relay does not operate. Then Battery E2 shown in the circuit com-
of clock pulse. Clock pulse is given press S2 and try again. prises two lithium cells of 3V each,
from CS pin of IC4. If pin 8 of IC9 is The 9-digit number can be reduced which safeguard the memory during
high during clock pulse, the output Q to a 4-digit number by making some power failure. A 6V regulated power
of IC11 goes high and Q goes low. minor changes in the connections of supply circuit is shown in Fig. 2. As all
When Q goes high, clock input is kept IC6, by making it operate as a divide the ICs used are of CMOS type, power
high and no more input data is accepted by five counter. IC5 and IC8 are BCD supply can range from 3 to 15V. A 6V
by the flip-flop. to 7-segment latch decoder/drivers. The power supply is chosen for convenience
IC10 (MM74C08) is a quad AND display is latched till the next clock and the 7-segment LED displays are
gate. When counter output is 1001 (9), pulse arrives. Switch S1 is placed such biased according to that. Both the PCBs
pin 3 of IC10 goes high. Q output of IC that it is accessible only after opening are double sided with plated through
11 and output at pin 3 of IC10 are the lock. holes. The displays can be located at a
again ANDed to give trigger to the re- The lock can be used as a hardware convenient place and are not attached
lay. So, when the count is 9 and Q is lock for electronic equipment. to the main PCBs.
HUMIDITY CONTROLLER
DINESH KUMAR RAHEJA
S
ummer in India is very hard to some relief from the scorching heat. In many coolers fan speed control-
bear. Everyone wants a breeze In many houses, rooms are quite lers are provided, but there is no provi-
of cool air, whether at office, small and ventilation is also inadequate, sion for humidity control. Here is a
workshop or at home. It is also a well and if coolers are used continuously low-cost and easy-to-build humidity
known fact that everybody cannot af- for a long time, excessive humidity re- controller, which can easily be installed
ford an airconditioner. In cities, people sults. This can cause serious diseases in any desert cooler, and the user can
mostly use desert coolers that provide related to lungs and skin. get the desired level of humidity.
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the humidity controller.
PARTS LIST
Circuit description
Semiconductors : VR1, VR2 100-kilohm linear, dual
IC1 NE555 timer pot. (tandem type) This controller is designed to switch
T1 AC187/SL100 npn tran- on/off the motor of the water pump
sistor with heatsink Capacitors:
D1,D2 1N4148 silicon switching C1, C2 470F, 16V electrolytic
automatically. A commonly available
diode C3 0.01F ceramic disc 555 timer IC is used as the basic build-
D3-D5 1N4007 silicon rectifier C4 1000F, 16V electrolytic ing block of the controller. The timer is
diode configured in astable multivibrator
Miscellaneous: mode, and generates a train of square
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless RL1 6V, 100-ohm SPST relay
stated otherwise): X1 230V AC primary to 6V wave pulses at its output.
R1 1-kilohm 0-6V, 250mA step-down A dual potentiometer (tandem type)
R2 10-kilohm transformer is used to control the duty cycle (on
R3 8.2-kilohm time/cycle time ratio) of the square
decreased by the same amount, and
vice-versa. This increases the on time
by an amount (say +t sec.), and simul-
taneously decreases the off time by the
same amount (-t sec.), keeping the cycle
time constant. In other words, the pulse
width of the square wave is controlled
by the position of the dual pot.
The relay switches the 230V AC
Fig. 2: PCB layout for the humidity Fig. 3: Component layout for the
controller. humidity controller.
supply to the motor of the pump, which
supplies water only during the on time,
when the timer output (at pin 3) is high.
wave generated by the timer. An +Vcc during the time Ton, and For the rest of the cycle time, the pump
npn transistor (AC187/SL100) is used then discharge through resistor R2, di- motor remains off. This action is re-
to interface the relay to the timer IC, ode D2, potentiometer VR2 and peated automatically every minute. In
to avoid overloading of the output stage. discharge pin 7 of timer IC1 up to this way, the excessive humidity is con-
one-third times the value of +Vcc, trolled. The humidity control action can
Working during the time Toff, given by the equa- be set anywhere between 10 to 90 per
tions: cent of the maximum humidity obtained
The on time and the off time de- Ton = 0.69 x (Rl + VR1 + R2) x Cl without a controller.
pend on the values of resistor Rl and seconds
capacitor C1, used in the charging and and Toff = 0.69 x (R2 + VR2) x Cl Installation
discharging paths, respectively. Here, seconds
two silicon diodes Dl and D2 (1N4148) Also, the cycle time of the square Considering the lack of space in
are used to split the charging and dis- wave is given by: the front panel and excess of water
charging currents through dual poten- Tc = Ton + Toff = 0.69 x (Rl + VRl vapour inside the cooler, it is recom-
tiometer VR1 and VR2, respectively, + VR2 + 2 x R2) x (C1 + C2) seconds. mended to install this controller in a
so that capacitors Cl and C2 charge In this circuit, the cycle time is set small box outside the cooler. However,
through +Vcc, resistor Rl, potentio- one minute approx. The dual potenti- the potentiometer can be fixed within
meter VR1, diode Dl and resistor ometer (tandem type) is wired in such the front panel.
R2 up to two-third times the value of a way that if VR1 is increased, VR2 is
DOORBELL-CUM-SECURITY
ALARM
A.U. AHMED
M
ost security systems suffer 2. Multizone operation. Open/close 4. Use of strong metallic enclosure
from the drawback that loop conditions of a number of entry- and key switches as mode changeover
either they require a num- exit points or zones can be sensed and switches and reset enable switch make
ber of keyboard switches to be mounted monitored. LEDs on the front panel of the control unit virtually invulnerable.
outside or they need a hidden switch the main control unit indicate the condi- Once activated, the control unit cannot
(prone to be detected), which defeats tions of corresponding zones. be deactivated without reset enable key,
the very purpose of authorised entry. 3. Multimode Operation. It oper- as it is provided with a battery in its
The security system described here re- ates in two modes: (a) maximum se- metallic enclosure.
quires only one doorbell push-button curity mode, and (b) minimum secu- 5. Absence of vulnerable keyboard
switch to be mounted outside. And it rity mode. In maximum security switches mounted outside or detection-
also serves as a musical doorbell. mode, fault conditions cause a wail- prone hidden switch realise the pur-
The doorbell-cum-security alarm ing alarm which is loud enough to at- pose of alarm for authorised entry.
system so designed is specially meant tract the neighbours and/or deter the Only a single doorbell switch serves
for use in domestic flats and apart- burglars psychologically. In minimum the purpose.
ments, etc. mode, the irritation or chaos often 6. Changeable code. The single-
The salient features of the system caused by carelessness to defeat the digit code number to defeat the alarm
are: alarm by authorised persons can be can be changed periodically.
1. It can be used as a musical door- avoided. However, entry and exit are 7. Self-resetting audible alarm
bell and security alarm system simulta- announced with soft musical tunes of along with manual resetting facility
neously. short duration. which also resets the zone indication
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the door-bell-cum-security alarm
60
Note: Resistor R29 through R33 and capacitors C11 through C15 are not shown in the component layout
(Fig. 4). However the same components should be mounted on the sensors (A1-A5) and grounded.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the doorbell-cum-security alarm.
ELECTRONICS PROJECTS-15
LED. PARTS LIST
Semiconductors: VR2 47-kilohm miniature
Circuit IC1-IC9 555 timer chip preset
IC10 CD4017 decade counter VR3 100-kilohm miniature
The block diagram of the circuit is IC11 UM3482A musical chip preset
shown in Fig. 1. The circuit has five IC12 7812 three-terminal VR4 22-kilohm miniature
voltage regulator preset
sensors. Each sensor may be a push T1,T12 SL100 npn transistor
switch, limit switch, micro switch or a T2-T11 BC148 npn transistor Capacitors:
closed-loop wire connection which T13 SK100 pnp transistor C1,C6-C10 0.1F ceramic disc
opens with the opening of a door or a D1,D2,D7-D14 1N4007 silicon rectifier C2 0.0047F ceramic disc
diode C3-C5,
window. D3,D6 1N4148 silicon C24.C26 100F, 25V electrolytic
Open condition of the sensor re- switching diode C11-C15,
mains stored in the bistable memory D4, D5 4.7V, 300mW zener C18,C22 1F, 25V electrolytic
till it is reset. The positive going edge diode C16 10F, 25V electrolytic
of the bistable output causes a sharp
Resistors: (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless C19 47F, 25V electrolytic
pulse after the blocking capacitor and stated otherwise): C20 3.3F, 25V electrolytic
triggers the alarm monostable. R1,R29-R33 C21 0.001F, ceramic disc
In maximum security mode the R48, R50 4.7-kilohm C23 33pF, ceramic disc
monostable produces a long duration R2 5.6-kilohm C25 2200 F, 30V electrolytic
R3, R42 47-kilohm
output which enables the wailer cir- R4, R8 1.5-kilohm Miscellaneous:
cuit. In minimum security mode it gives R5 33-kilohm S1,S2 Key switches: 2-pole, 2-
a short-duration high output which en- R9 6.8-kilohm way (See text)
ables the musical alarm. R7, R34, R38, R43, S3 Push-to-off switch
R44.R49, 100-kilohm S4, S5 Push-to-on switch
Each time the musical alarm is acti- R10-R12,R24-R28, S6 On-off switch
vated by doorbell push switch, a pulse R36,R40 1-kilohm S7 1-pole, 10-way switch
reaches the counter IC and its decimal R13,R45,R54 470-kilohm LS Speaker 8-ohm
count output is incremented. At a de- R14 2.2-megohm 5-way sockets or
sired count, selected by 10-way switch R15, R37 10-kilohm terminal strip
R16 3.9-kilohm micro/limit/push
S7, reset monostable is triggered. Its R17,R41,R47 220-kilohm switches for sensor
output provides the necessary reset R18 120-ohm (see text)
pulse to alarm monostable and bistable R19-R23 1.2-kilohm Suitable metal enclosure
memories. R35, R6 220-ohm Heatsinks
R39 680-kilohm Knob for switch S7
Reset monostable can be triggered R46, R52 8.2-kilohm Connection wires,
by reset pushbutton also, only after be- R51 82-kilohm solder, PCB, nuts,
ing enabled by switch S2. R53 2.2-kilohm bolts etc
R55 150-kilohm LED1-LED2 Green LED
VR1 220-kilohm miniature
Sensors preset
LED3-LED6,
LED7,LED11 Red LED
Sensors Al to A5 may be any con-
tacts that open up with the opening or and vulnerable sections of a door or ever, old issues of EFY can provide
tampering of the corresponding doors window. one with numerous such circuits.
or windows they guard. These may be For better utilisation of the circuit, A sensor (say Al) can be replaced
push switches, limit switches or micro a sensor which may be a combination easily with an LDR or a photo-diode to
switches mounted on the door and win- of closed-loop wire, or a number of construct an unmodulated light beam
dow frames in such an ingenious way push/limit switches connected in series (ordinary or infrared) arrangement. In
that a little opening of the door/win- to give adequate protection to all the that case, resistors R29 to R33 should
dow causes the switch contacts to open. doors and windows in a zone, may be be replaced with presets in the range of
With the prototype, spring-loaded used. In the prototype, though only four 100-kilohm. However, the actual value
bayonet contacts salvaged from elec- zones had been used, each zone cov- of these resistors depends on factors,
tric bulbholder, partly embedded within ered several doors and windows. such as the intensity of light beam used,
the hole drilled in the wooden More ingeniously, the circuit can ambient light and focusing arrangement
doorframe and a small brass strip fixed be interfaced with some other type of of the beam.
on the door were used as a substitute sensors, such as modulated infrared
for limit switch. light beam, proximity sensors, and Memory
The sensor may even be a closed movement detectors. In these cases the
loop of wire, criss-crossed across weak N/C contacts of the output relays or If a door/window is closed after a
portions of wooden door or glass panes, open-collector output transistors (nor- brief opening, it becomes necessary to
fixed with the help of small nails or mally conducting) of the said devices have the fault condition stored in a
pasted with suitable glue or narrow- should replace the sensors. memory, till reset, for identification of
width cellotape. Thus, it can guard weak The circuits of such devices are be- the faulty zone. IC4 through IC9 are
yond the scope of this article. How- wired as bistable multivibrators. An
Fig. 3: Actual-size PCB layout for the doorbell-cum-security alarm
only, speaker is connected to both the
sections simultaneously through diodes
Dl and D2.
Doorbell switch S5 can also trigger
IC11.While IC11 is activated from IC3
output through diode D3, transistor T10
pulls down pin 7 of IC11. It causes a
little change in the pitch of musical
tune. Though barely distinguishable,
this change of pitch can differentiate
Fig 5: Power supply for the the doorbell tune from the alarm tune.
doorbell-cum-security alarm. A small regulator constructed around
curity mode, the transistor T12 provides the necessary 3.5
output is fed to en- volts for IC11. Forward voltage drop
able the musical IC across LED3 and LED4 determines the
UM3482A for 45 regulator voltage and also serves as
seconds. However, power on indicator. Diode D4 is used
a reset during these as an additional protection for IC11.
periods can stop the
alarm by resetting Counter
IC3.
These durations Each time IC11 emits a musical
may be changed as tune, its pin 10 goes low. This active
per individual choice by low pulse, after being suitably changed
changing the values of resis- in phase and voltage by transistors T9
tors R13 and R14. To make the and T8, is fed to clock input of IC10.
Fig 6: Suggested front panel
layout for the security alarm.
alarm of non-self-resetting type, one IC10 counts the number of times
should simply remove resistor R14. the doorbell rings; its decimal count
open sensor triggers the corresponding Max. security mode outputs are incremented accordingly.
bistable to make its output high and and alarm active conditions At the desired count selected by S7,
cause the corresponding LED to glow are indicated by LED6 and LED5, transistor T4 conducts and triggers re-
even after the fault is rectified. respectively. set monostable IC9.
The high outputs of the bistables IC10 normally kept reset by con-
are blocked by capacitors C6 to C10. Wailer ducting transistor T6, is enabled only
Only a sharp positive pulse produced when clock signal goes high and tran-
at the positive-going edge of any High output from IC3 enables IC1 sistor T7 discharges through capacitor
biastable output reaches transistor T3, and IC2, both wired as squarewave C19 and diode D6. If another clock
which triggers the alarm monostable oscillators in maximum security mode. signal does not arrive within the next
IC3. Output of IC2 is used to modulate the 20 seconds, C19 gets charged up to
Use of pin 6 as reset pin, instead of frequency of IC1. reset voltage level through resistor R45,
the conventional pin 4, prevents IC4 The modulating frequency, depth of and IC10 gets reset.
from resetting as a long fault condition modulation and modulated frequency IC10 is also kept reset by transistor
persists. This facilitates visual monitor- can be adjusted as per individual choice T5 while the alarm activating signal is
ing of all the zones, while keeping reset with the help of presets VR3, VR2 and high.
on to disable audible alarm. This also VR1 respectively. The output power is
prevents IC3 from retriggering after a increased by transistor Tl. Reset monostable
reset with fault condition persisting.
Capacitors C11 through C15 are Musical alarm and doorbell IC9, also wired as a monostable
used to suppress electrical interferences multivibrator, provides the necessary
picked up by long sensor wires, which High output from IC3 enables musi- reset pulse. It serves the dual purpose
may otherwise cause a false alarm. cal IC11 (UM3482A) through diode D3 of resetting and defeating the system
and resistor R52 only in the minimum for 30 seconds for authorised entry-
Alarm monostable mode. Resistor R53, diode D5 and ca- exit. However, this duration can be
pacitor C20 keep the voltage at pin 4 of changed by changing the values of re-
IC3 is wired as a monostable IC11 within safe permissible limit. sistor R39 and capacitor C17 as per
multivibrator. The destination and dura- The pitch of the music is determined requirement.
tion of its output are controlled by mode by resistor R34 and capacitor C23. Out- IC9 can be triggered by switch S6
selection switch Sl. put from ICl1 is fed to transistor T11- or S4 only when enabled by switch S2.
In maximum security mode, this T13 combination through volume con- With S2 in RST disable position IC9
output enables the wailer for approxi- trol preset VR4. Since both the wailer can only be triggered by transistor T4
mately five minutes. In minimum se- and musical ICs provide square waves at the desired count (selected by switch
S2 locked in enable position. It makes
normal entry-exit possible, but it should
be used only when security problems
can be overlooked.
Prior to leaving home unattended,
the mode must be selected as Max.
Just before the last person leaves, one
should open switch S7, activate reset
pulse for 30 seconds by pressing switch
S4 (reset active indication comes on),
disable further reset by switch S2, exit
and shut the door.
Alarm can be defeated for entry from
outside only if the number N selected
Fig. 7: Internal view of the doorbell-cum-security alarm. by switch S7 is known. To defeat the
alarm, press doorbell switch S5 to pro-
S7) of doorbell ring. Reset active and locksmechanically linked with push duce a musical tune. Only after the tune
reset enable conditions are displayed type 2-pole, 2-way switcheswere in- comes to its end (but within next 20 sec-
by LED1 and LED2 respectively. stalled. Though little mechanical ad- onds) again press switch S5.
justment was needed to position the The procedure should be repeated
Power supply switch and lock, it made an effective for Nth time. At the beginning of the
low-cost substitute for key switch. Nth tune, the alarm deactivates itself
The circuit in Fig. 5 provides the for 30 seconds. This duration is suffi-
Mounting of drawerlocks, push-
necessary 12 volt regulated power sup- cient for one to enter and again shut
switches, PCB, transformer, speaker,
ply to the circuit. Current rating of the the door. Then the alarm system can be
etc are illustrated in Fig. 7.
transformer is kept on the higher side defeated for any length of time by en-
The main unit should be mounted
to prevent heating due to continuous abling reset by switch Sl and keeping
rigidly in a suitable indoor location, so
operation. switch S7 closed.
that neighbours and guards attention
A 12-volt battery is essential as a The defeating process itself acts as
can be attracted by the wailing sound.
backup in case of power failure or a an attraction to neighbours attention if
The location should be close to the
tampered power cord. a high value of N is selected. Selec-
main entrance, so that doorbell actu-
Construction ated music can be heard outside as well. tion of number 0 and 1 is naturally
The preset volume control VR4 should prohibited.
The prototype was assembled on a be adjusted likewise. Switch S3 tests all the zones
veroboard. However, a suggested PCB Since the circuit is designed to be simultaneously. It should cause all the
layout and a component layout are used indoor only, for an intruder it may faulty zone indicating LEDs and alarm
given in Figs 3 and 4, respectively. not be possible to get access to the active LED to glow along with the au-
Use of IC sockets is recommended main unit without activating the alarm. dible alarm. A reset should cause the
only for IC4 through IC8, so that only Even then, suitable iron angles, firmly above LEDs to extinguish and reset
the required ICs can be put into the fixed in the wall, may be used to mount active LED should come on.
circuit. IC12, Tl, T12 and T13 must be the main unit rigidly. Maximum security mode operation
mounted on heatsinks. Five-way sock- A burglar needs a lot of courage to with reset disabled is essential to leave
ets or terminal strips may be mounted try to dismantle a wailing box from the the house unattended. This mode may
at the back of enclosure for connec- wall or to open the enclosure screws to also prove useful at night, with occu-
tions of sensors and switch S5. tamper with the circuit. Even if he suc- pants present in the house, depending
It is suggested that only a section of ceeds in detaching the unit from the on security risks.
the circuit should be assembled and wall, it seems highly unlikely that he In day time, the irritating proce-
tested before proceeding to next section. would prefer to carry a wailing box dure during frequent entry-exit may be
Housing of the full circuit within a under his arm! avoided with the minimum mode opera-
strong metallic enclosure is of vital im- Each soldering and fitting should tion. With occupants (usually house-
portance to make the main unit tamper- be strong enough to withstand impacts, wives) busy in their household chores,
proof. Suggested front panel layout is caused by hard blows on the enclosure. frequent exit-entry of children and ser-
shown in Fig. 6. The loudspeaker, with Though not necessary, one zone may vants makes it impossible to lock the
small holes, should also be mounted be engaged to booby-trap the main unit, entrance. Min. mode gives necessary,
inside the enclosure. The enclosure if used in other than the domestic envi- but soft musical warning to check the
should have good ventilation, but at the ronment. identity of the intruder.
same time it should be sufficiently pro- A switch mounted indoor and con-
tected against tampering from outside. Operation nected in parallel with a sensor can be
In prototype, the use of keys used to bypass that particular sensor.
switches was avoided due to their high The alarm system can be kept de- However, the switch should be opened
cost. Instead, ordinary, low-cost drawer feated by keeping switch S6 closed with for normal use of the sensor.
IMPROVED THREE-PHASE
POWER SUPPLY CARD
CHHAJED MAHAVIR D.
A
common requirement in the not have any provision to take care of addition, the circuit provides a soft on/
industry is that of a single/ rapid on/off switching transients in the off switch (manual) for up to 5kW load,
dual-phase preventer. The cur- mains power supply. The circuit, de- avoiding any mechanical contacts.
rent practice is to use a separate circuit scribed here, overcomes such drawbacks
for each instrument. Such circuits do in a simple and economical manner. In
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the three-phase power supply card.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the card.
be altered by changing
the value of resistor
R3 or capacitor C3.
The time duration is
given by the relation-
ship:
T=1.1 (R3xC3)
The output pin of
IC 555 is connected
Fig 3: Actual-size suggested PCB layout for the card.
to clock pin of JK
flip-flop as clock in-
put. The T input of
flip-flop is tied to Vcc.
Also, the power-on-
reset is provided to
the JK flip-flop so
that whenever the B
phase resumes, the
output Q of the flip-
flop should be high.
Also, a manual on/
off switch is provided
Principle of working load has a timer circuitry and switch, an in this system. Assum-
opto-isolator and relay circuitry. ing all the phases are present in the sys-
Block diagram of the circuit is Assuming that only B phase is tem, when on switch is momentarily
shown in Fig.l. The card to be placed present (out of R, Y and B), the timer pressed the relay gets energised and the
between the mains power supply and the circuit output will become high (when loads get connected to the supply lines.
PARTS LIST power on the system output becomes When off switch is pressed, the relay
Semiconductors: high after 10-sec. delay), and the gets de-energised and the loads get dis-
IC1 555 timer transition from low to high is applied connected from the supply lines.
1C2 CD4027 dual JK flip-flop to clock input of JK flip-flop, which The main advantage of this arrange
IC3 MCT2E opto-coupler is edge triggered. But since the Y ment is avoidance of bulky mechanical
Tl BC157B pnp transistor
T2 SL100 npn transistor phase is absent, the opto-isolator does switches, and the problems of arcing
Triac BT136 triac (4A, 400V) not turn on in spite of getting the base associated with them.
D1-D4, drive. Thus there will be no output from The +12V supply derived from the
D6, D7 1N4001 rectifier diode the opto-isolator (and therefore from re- Y phase is connected to transistor of
D5 1N4148 silicon switching
diode
lay) as long as only B phase is present. opto-isolator. So, if the Y phase is not
If only two phases Y and B are present, the transistor will not turn on,
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon, unless present, the output of the opto-isolator in spite of getting base drive. The R
stated otherwise): becomes high and gets applied to the phase is connected to the relay and its
R1,R2, relay circuitry. But since R phase is associated circuitry.
R4-R7 10-kilohm
R3 100-kilohm absent, the relay does not turn on, and
R8 4.7-kilohm hence the load does not get the supply. Construction
R9,R11 1-kilohm From the above discussion, its clear
R10 1-megohm that, for the load to be connected to the The PCB and component layout of
mains, all the three phases must be pres- the circuit are shown in Figs. 3 and 4,
Capacitors:
C 1, C8 470F, 25V electrolytic ent. Interchanging the phase connections respectively.
C2,C5,C6 to the three blocks does not alter the For perfect soldering, use of a good
C7 0.1F ceramic disc circuit action. soldering gun is essential. Also, handle
C3 l00F, 25V electrolytic CMOS IC CD4027 with utmost care.
Circuit description Use IC bases for 555, MCT2E and
Miscellaneous: CD4027 to avoid possibility of damage
S1, S2 Push-to-on switch In order to prevent the load from during soldering.
X1 230V AC primary, 0-12V, responding to rapid on/off switching of The circuit achieves its desired
350mA sec. transformer mains supply, a provision is made for objectives with minimal components,
X2 230V AC primary, 12V-0-
12V, 250mA sec. adjustable deadband setting. (During and is very inexpensive. As such, the
transformer this period the load does not get con- circuit should gain ready acceptance in
RL1 230V 25A, 3-pole, 1-way nected to the mains when the power sup- the industry.
relay ply resumes.) This is achieved by using
Suggested PCB
IC bases
IC 555 in monostable configuration, as
shown in Fig.2. The time duration can
SOLIDSTATE
ADVERTISEMENT DISPLAY
PRADEEP G.
A
dvertisements have become a Clock pulse Letters Illuminated Remarks
popular means of communica-
0 X X X X X X X (All off)
tion through newspapers and 1st W X X X X X X (I letter on)
television for increasing sales of any 2nd W E X X X X X (2 letters on)
product. Nowadays, people prefer 3rd W E L X X X X (3 letters on)
shops that put up bright and beautiful 4th W E L C X X X (4 letters on)
5th W E L C O X X (5 letters on)
lights to attract people. 6th W E L C O M X (6 letters on)
The advertisement display de- 7th W E L C O M E (7 letters on)
scribed here is inexpensive and easy 8th X X X X X X X (All off)
to construct. The circuit uses readily 9th W X X X X X X (1 letter on)
available low-cost components. To dis- 10th W E X X X X X (2 letters on)
Note: X indicates off state of a bulb
play a seven-letter word WELCOME,
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the solidstate advertisement display.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 NE555 timer
IC2 74HCT164 8-bit shift
register
IC3 7805 5V regulator
T1-T8 BC147B npn transisor
T9 2N3439 npn transistor
Dl lN4001silicon rectifier
diode
D2-D5 1N4007 silicon
rectifier diode
Triac1-Triac7 BT136
400V, 4A triac

stated otherwise):
Rl 10-kilohm
R2-R9 2.2-kilohm
RI0 1-kilohm
R11-R17 330-ohm
R18 4.7-kilohm
R19 15-kilohm, 10-watt
VR1 100-kilohm
Fig. 2: Actual-size PCB layout for the advertisement display. Capacitors:

C1 4.7F,10V electrolytic
C2-C5 0.1F ceramic disc
Miscellaneous:
IC sockets
PCB
LEDs
letters are made with multicolour semi-

transparent plastic sheets and each of
the letters is separated by black opaque
sheets (cardboard, mica, hylam etc).
Each letter is displayed one by one
and finally all letters of WELCOME or
any other word are displayed. The cir-
cuit automatically resets after the last
letter. Then again, the circuit begins to
function by displaying the letters. This
process is repeated endlessly.
Circuit
The heart of the circuit is an 8-bit
TTL shift-register 74HCT164. It is
available in the market for about Rs
18.
IC1 555 functions as a clock-pulse
generator in free-running mode. The
pulse rate of IC1 can be varied by poten-
tiometer VR1, and hence the speed of
display of the letters can be varied. For
each clock pulse from IC1, IC2 shifts
its output one by one till the seventh
output.
After the seventh pulse from IC1,
the word WELCOME is completely
displayed. Thereafter, the eighth out-
put goes high. Then transistor T8
Fig. 4: Circuit diagram for arrangement of bulbs. quickly conducts and holds pin 9 (re-
crete transistor stages. The use of tran-
sistor T8 eliminates the need for an
extra IC inverter like 7404.
The complete sequence of operation
is given in the truth table.
Assembly
The complete circuit for the
solidstate advertisement display can be
assembled on a 12cm x 7.5cm PCB.
All ICs and triacs are soldered on the
Fig. 5: Circuit for optional LED display. PCB shown in Fig. 2. The ground line
of PCB is connected to neutral wire of
AC mains. One terminal connecting
230V AC bulbs is connected to the live
wire of AC mains. Remaining termi-
nals of all bulbs are connected to the
seven triacs. In the prototype, IC sock-
ets were used for IC1 and IC2.
IC3 (7805), a 5V regulator, is in-
cluded in the circuit to power the TTL
IC. The entire circuit can be powered
from an ordinary 9V or 12V battery
Fig. 6: Display board setup. eliminator. Dont forget to use adequate
heatsink for all triacs. If one wishes to
set) of IC2 at ground level. All outputs displaying the letters, one by one. The use series of LEDs, the triacs can be
go low and all bulbs are switched off. display may be stopped by switching replaced with high voltage 2N3439
As IC1 is continuously operating, off the power supply. transistors as shown in Fig. 5. All seven
the circuit begins to function again by All triacs are triggered by using dis- triacs can be replaced with 2N3439
transistors.
Readers Comments: to use as many as seven of 555 ICs for display and the circuit works endlessly.
I am very thankful to Pradeep G. for his making the same display work (EFY K.P. Viswanathan
circuit. Due to non-availability of IC Jan91). Each letter is lit up one-by-one Calicut
74HCT164, I used IC 555 as clock pulse from left to right, giving a visual effect
and a CMOS IC CD4017 as counter in of words. Why cant we give a wiping The author Pradeep G. Replies:
place of IC 74HCT164. But only one effect also? Instead of connecting last The direct replacement of IC
LED is glowing continuously. Could the output(pin 13 inverted by transistor T8) 74HCT164 with counter IC 4017 is not
author suggest any modifications? to reset pin 9, it can be connected to one proper. While 4017 is a decade counter,
Himangshu Majamdar of the serial input pins (1 or 2). the 74HCT164 is an 8-bit shift register.
Midnapore Reset pin can be clamped to For wiping effect the circuit may be
The solidstate advertisement display positive rail. With this small change modified, as described by Mr
is no doubt an inexpensive circuit. I had wiping effect is given to the total Viswanathan.
AUTO-CHANGING IN/OUT
INDICATOR WITH DOOR-BELL
UNNIKRISHNAN P.R.
G
enerally, whether a person is
in or out is indicated
through a cardboard indica-
tor which has to be turned for each
arrival or departure. Instead of this,
electronic indicators can also be used.
However, these also need to be set for
changing the display. So, if you forget
to change the display the indicator be-
comes useless.
The circuit described here solves
this problem. It does not need any set-
ting or adjustment for each change. It Fig. 1: Block diagram for the auto-changing in/out indicator with door-bell.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the auto-changing in/out indicator with door-bell.
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the main circuit. Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 5: PCB layout for the display circuit. Fig. 6: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 5.
automatically changes the display when energy. Principle of operation

you enter or leave your office or home. 3. If you are inside then a press on
It has the following features: the switch displays IN and sounds a The circuit works on the basic prin-
1. The IN and OUT signs are bell inside the home for each press of ciple of a touch switch. The input of
indicated by using LED displays. bell switch. the circuit carries a touch plate (key
2. It displays IN/OUT only when 4. If you are out then a press of the plate). You must place the key of the
a guest presses the calling bell switch. switch will display OUT and the bell main door on the surface of this plate
This will avoid unwanted wastage of will ring inside. once, before you take it away, so that
the display keeps showing OUT.
When power supply is switched on, the
PARTS LIST display shows IN. When you leave home
Semiconductors: R9, RIO 8.2-kilohm you must take the key. Then, the touch
ICI,IC3 555 timer R11-R26 680-ohm switch is enabled because the key is placed
IC2 4017 decade counter
T1 BC149C npn transistor Capacitors: on the plate. So the display is changed to
T2-T5 BEL188 pnp transistor C1,C6,C7 100F,25V electrolytic OUT. When you reach home, you place
D1,D2 1N4001 rectifier diode the key on the plate. And again, the touch
C2,C5 0.0lF ceramic disc switch is activated and the display is flipped
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless C3 3.3F,16V electrolytic
to IN.
stated otherwise): C4 0.1F ceramic disc
R1,R3 10-kilohm
R2 470-kilohm Miscellaneous: Circuit
R4 1-kilohm DIS1-DIS3 LTS 543 common
R5 6.8-kilohm cathode display The circuit uses two 555 ICs and
R6 47-ohm, 1 watt LS1,LS2 4-ohm speaker one decade counter IC 4017. IC1 and
R7.R8 5.6-kilohm Sl Push-to-on switch IC2 make the clap switch. The base of
is enabled. If you are out then the sec- suitable cabinet. This box may be fixed
ond speaker (LS2) is enabled. in place of the calling bell switch or
anywhere in the sit-out, so that a guest
Working may see it at the first look. The exter-
nal speaker can be fixed anywhere in-
When you touch the key plate, side the house. The key plate should
transistor Tl gets biased. So, IC1 is also be fixed in the house. It is better
triggered. This changes the output of if the key plate is fitted near the main
IC1 from low to a high state. This high door. The key plate must be kept at a
state remains for about 52 seconds. safe place to avoid unwanted touch-
Since output of IC1 is given to IC2, the ing. It should be fixed at a height to
output of IC2 also changes from the keep it away from children.
low to high state, with change in the Figs. 3 and 4 show the main PCB
output of IC1. This changes the dis- and the component layout, respectively.
Fig. 7: Suggested front panel layout. play and rings the bell through the Figs. 5 and 6 show the display PCB
speaker. and the component layout, respectively.
transistor Tl carries the touch plate (key Make a suitable cover and fit the
plate). IC3 functions as an oscillator. It Installation main PCB, display PCB, LS2 and Sl in
produces a frequency of about 1kHz it. A model of the front panel is shown
which is applied to two speakers. If The circuits of the internal speaker in Fig. 7.
you are in, then the first speaker (LS1) (LS2) and switch Sl may be fitted in a
TELEX - COMPUTER
CHANGEOVER SWITCH
SANJOY N. ROY
T
his circuit is very useful for
data communications in a data
communication centre which
does not have a telex dialing system. If
leased communication channels become
unserviceable, but telex is in working
condition, then data from computer can
be sent through the telex line, using this
computer - telex changeover switch.
This switch is useful also in situations
where data or messages stored in com-
puters need to be transmitted on telex
line through the interconnection be-
Fig. 1: Block diagram for the telex-computer changeover switch.
tween a computer and a telex.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the telex-computer changeover switch.
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 (a-e) 7404 hex inverter
IC2 (N1-N3) 7400 quad 2-input
NAND gate
IC3 7805 +5V regulator
T1 BC107 npn transistor
T2 SKI 00 pnp transistor
T3 SL100 npn transistor

stated otherwise):
R1,R2 10-kilohm, l-watt
R3,R4 1-kilohm
R5,R8 47-kilohm
R6 1.2-kilohm
R7 4.7-kilohm
R9,R10 680-ohm, 0.5-watt
R11,R12 470-ohm, 1-watt
Capacitors:
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the computer-telex changeover switch. C1,C2 0.1F ceramic disc
Miscellaneous:
RL1 A15,T Bv 3000/36
polar relay
PCB etc.
sending line of the telex, as shown in

the block diagram (Fig. l).
Operation
If it is desired to send data through
telex, then telex-computer selecting
switch should be in telex position. Now,
operation of telex is restored. If it is
desired to send data from computer
through telex line, then, first keep the
selecting switch in telex position and
dial the number to which data is to be
Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3. transmitted. After the line connection
is established with the number dialed,
i.e. ending of ring back tone, etc, se-
lecting switch should be flipped to com-
puter position. At this stage, transmis-
sion of command data from computer
will take place through this switch to
telex line. The dialed station will now
receive data from computer in their
telex machine.
Technical description
The +60V or -60V telegraph signal
Fig. 5: Internal structure of the polar relay. either from LTU or from telex machine
is converted to +5V or 0V by a clipper
circuit. The output of the clipper is fed
General description shorted to the output. One of the inputs to one of the inputs of a two-input AND
is connected to the transmission side gate, as shown in Fig.2. The other in-
The telex-computer switch has two of the Line Terminating Unit [LTU], put of AND gate is fed from a (High-
inputs and one output. There is an in- working at 50 Bauds. The other input Low) bounce-free switch.
put selecting switch. With the opera- is connected to the transmission leg of The bounce-free switch is made up
tion of this switch, it appears that any the telex machine. Output of the telex- of inverters and a toggle switch. The
one of the inputs is electronically computer switch is connected to the operation of bounce-free switch does
not change its states when the tongue high. When collector of T2 is high, it is telegraph signals into +60V or -60V
(pole) of the toggle switch jumps from conducting, and there is a current flow telegraph signals. The tongue (pole) of
one contact to the other, and also when from pin 8 to pin 5 of polar relay coil. polar relay generally known as A
it bounces back on its arrival from the If collector of T3 is high, it means that toggles between terminals known as
other. The output changes only when it is not conducting. Hence, there is no Z and T. Terminals (contacts) Z
the tongue shifts and makes firm con- current flow through pin 1 to pin 4 of and T are connected to +60V and -
tacts with terminals. the polar relay. This causes relay tongue 60V terminals of telegraph power sup-
Whenever one input of NAND gates to move in some particular direction. ply. At tongue A, where +60V and -
N1 and N2 is kept high from high-low Similarly, when collector of transis- 60V telegraph signals, either from com-
bounce-free switch, the 5V or 0V tele- tor Tl is high, collectors of T2 and T3 puter or from telex machine, depend-
graph signal at the other input will be are low, hence T3 conducts and T2 does ing on selection, are available and fed
available at the output of the NAND not conduct. Now, there is a current through the send side of telex line.
gate, in inverted form. flow in the relay coil from pin 1 to pin The actual PCB for the purpose is
The outputs of two NAND gates 4 and no current flow in coil from pin 8 shown in Fig. 3 and component layout
are ORed (NAND gate N3 acts as a to pin 5. This causes relay tongue to is shown in Fig. 4. Spark quenching
negative input logic NOR gate) and move in the reverse direction than that circuit is provided at the output of re-
fed to an electro-mechanical polar tele- of current flow from pin 8 to pin 5. lay tongue to suppress any spark, due
graph relay through transistors T2 and With this arrangement, polar relay to relay tongues movement. TTL chips
T3. When the output of gate N3 is high, is being actuated in both directions from are powered through a 5V regulator IC
the collector of transistor Tl is low and a single supply. The polar relay has chip (LM7805), derived from a 12V
that of transistors T2 and T3 are logic been used to convert the 5V or 0V supply.
60W ACTIVE
AMPLIFIER SYSTEM
DORAISWAMY VISWESWARAN
I
n a conventional hi-fi system, the
output from the power amplifier
drives two or three units. The
drive unit, which is the speaker, is the
device that actually transforms the elec-
trical signal from the amplifier into
sound pressure waves. Ideally, we
would use a single unit to cover the
whole frequency range, but in practice
we have to use two or three units to Fig. 1.: Block diagram for the active amplifier system.
Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the active amplifier system.
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the active amplifier system.
Fig. 4: Component layout for the active amplifier system.
cover the desired range of 50 Hz to 20
kHz, because of the following facts:
The useful frequency range of a
speaker drive unit over which a linear
output can be expected is primarily gov-
erned by two things. The low frequency
limit is defined by the resonance fre-
quency of the cone in the suspension
system. The cone has a mass which is
coupled with a spring, combining the
compliance of the suspension system
with the compliance or springiness of Fig. 5: Power supply for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.
the air in the enclosure.
Below the resonant frequency, the market, it has several inherent disad- cerns damping factor. A drive unit
unit is very inefficient and therefore vantages. The problem arises in the de- works just as effectively as a
requires a lot of power from the ampli- sign of such a filter. generators motor. When a transient
fier to gain any appreciable output. To design such a filter, two factors peak occurs, the amplifier drives the
Above the resonant frequency, the cone need to be knownthe impedance of cone outwards, and then applies a brak-
operates in the compliance region, the source and the impedance of the ing force. However, the cone will in-
giving a reasonably linear and efficient load. The source impedance is the out- evitably overshoot, and as it settles
transfer of energy. It is in this range put impedance of the amplifier and the back, it generates a current that is fed
that the drive unit can be used. connecting loads. With good quality back to the amplifier. If the impedance
As the frequency increases, a point leads, this should be less than a tenth presented by the amplifier is very low,
is reached when the wavelength of the of an ohm, and no problems present. or damping factor high, then the cur-
sound reaches half the circumference However, the load impedance is the rent will disappear quickly. If, how-
of the speaker cone. Above this fre- impedance of the drive unit itself. Fig.6 ever, the impedance of the amplifier
quency, different areas of the cone start shows the impedance of a typical loud- output is fairly high, the current will
moving in different ways, resulting in speaker. As you can see, the imped- affect the performance of the ampli-
phase anomalies and unwanted reso- ance varies considerably with fre- fier. Effectively, then, a high damping
nances. This then forms the upper frequency, and is, in fact, a filter designers factor increases the control of the am-
quency limit of the useful range of the nightmare. As you can imagine, cross- plifier over the movement of the
drive units. over design is an art in itself. speaker cone.
Considering the above limitations, The second problem arises from the In a passive speaker the crossover
the reproduction of the lower frequen- high currents involved in driving a loud- network forms a part of the impedance
cies, especially the base, requires a mas- speaker, which can reach tens of amps. that the drive unit sees as it looks
sive cone. For example, a 20cm bass At low currents, capacitors, inductors back at the amplifier output. In the pass
unit may have a resonant frequency of and resistors are linear components. band of the crossover filter, the imped-
around 40 Hz, but the upper frequency However, at high currents these can be ance of the crossover is fairly small,
limit would be 3 kHz. The reproduc- far from linear, introducing their own and the damping factor high. However,
tion of the middle order and higher distortions. in the cut-off regions, the impedance
frequencies requires a lighter cone. This is particularly true when high of the crossover rises, as it cuts out the
So, in the simplest system, we would values of inductance are required. To frequencies outside the pass band. This
have two drive units: one for reproduc- construct a coil with an inductance of means that the damping factor de-
tion of the bass frequencies, which we over, say, l0 mH, a ferrite core is re- creases, and the amplifier progressively
call the woofer and the other one suit- quired, if the size of the inductor is not loses control over the speaker cone.
able for high frequencies, which we call prohibitive. A ferrite core will impose On the other hand, in an active sys-
the tweeter. In the most popularly its nonlinear hysteresis curve on
used approach, we use a crossover net- the circuits, which could introduce
work, which splits the audio spectrum serious distortion at high currents.
and feeds the relevant drive units. As we have seen, the imped-
The crossover network consists of ance of a drive unit by itself is far
a passive filter network of inductors, from linear, having an impedance
capacitors and resistors, dividing the value and phase angle that is vari-
frequency range into a low frequency able with frequency. However, ca-
band which is fed to the woofer, a mid pacitors and inductors also intro-
frequency band which is fed to the duce considerable phase (voltage)
squawker, and a high frequency band lags and leads. A crossover net-
which is fed to the tweeter. work, while having a linear fre-
While this system works perfectly quency response, could present a
and adequately, and witnesses a num- very complex load to the amplifier. Fig. 6: Characteristics of impedance
ber of excellent passive speakers in the Another major problem con- of a typical speaker.
PARTS LIST pre-amp. The job of the crossover
Semiconductors:
network is simply to ensure that
IC1,IC2 TDA2002 the amplifier receives only those
TI,T3,T5 BC547 npn transistor frequencies that its drive unit can
T2,T4,T6 BC557 pnp transistor cope with in a linear fashion. The
T7 2N3055 npn transistor block diagram of an active sys-
D1,D2 1N4001 rectifier diode
tem is given in Fig. l.
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless A study of Fig. 1 will indi-
stated otherwise): cate that the frequency division
R1,R2 220-kilohm is done before the power ampli-
R3,R9,R14 5.6-kilohm Fig. 7: Construction of heatsinks.
R4,R10,R15 2.2-kilohm
fier stage by means of two elec-
R5,R11-R13 10-kilohm tronic filters. The divided signal is fed 1. The electronic crossover consists
R6 3.9-kilohm to two individual power amps, which of the low pass section and the high
R7,R8 150-kilohm then drive the woofer and tweeter. This pass section. The crossover frequency
R16,R19 220-ohm approach, enunciated in the early 80s, is 2 kHz. The filter slopes are set at 18
R17,R20 2.2-ohm
R18,R21 1-ohm did not find wide acceptance, mainly dB/octave. This steepness is required
R22 680-ohm, 0.5 watt because of reasons of economy, though for hi-fi reproduction.
VR1,VR2 10-kilohm pot. this system offers several exciting ad- 2. The power amplifiers used are
vantages over the passive system, such built around the rugged IC amps TDA
Capacitors:
C1,C22,C27 100F,25V electrolytic
as: 2002, which can withstand wide volt-
C2-C4,C20,C21 1. The individual amplifiers for age fluctuations. The use of these ICs
C26,C28 l00nF ceramic disc woofer and tweeter can be designed, makes the circuit suitable for fitting into
C5 470nF ceramic disc keeping the power requirements and the automobiles, having a 12V battery.
C6,C10,C15 4.7nF ceramic disc characteristics of the drive units in mind.
C7-C9 5600 pF ceramic disc
3. A smooth supply, using 2N3055
C11,C16, 2. The power supply design is sim- power transistor as series regulator, is
C17,C23 10F, 25V electrolytic pler and smaller. used for providing DC to the filter and
C12-C14 1.5nF ceramic disc 3. Short circuit protection circuitry the amplifier.
C18,C24 470F, 16V electrolytic can be done away with. 4. Because the power requirements
C29,C31 l000F, 25V electrolytic
4. A 220W passive amplifier would of the tweeter are less than those of
C30 47F, 25V electrolytic be required to give the same effect as a woofer, we have used drive unit with 8
3x25W active unit. ohms impedance for the tweeter and
Miscellaneous: 5. The loss in the inductors and the 40 ohms for the woofer.
X1 230V AC primary to phase shift in the capacitors of the
15V-0-15V, lAsec.
5. The dimensions of heatsinks for
transformer crossover network is avoided, leading the ICs and the series regulated tran-
8-ohm tweeter to better damping factor at all frequen- sistors are given in Fig.7.
4-ohm woofer cies (even in the proximity of the reso- The recommended PCB, sized
PCB, heatsinks etc. nances of the drive units). 12.5cm x 10cm, is shown in Fig. 3.
6. It is possible to compensate for The PCB is designed to accommodate
tem described here, the amplifier output differences in sensitivity between the the power supply as well.
is connected directly to the drive unit, drive units, simply by increasing or de- It is advisable to build the circuit
and one amplifier is used for each drive creasing the gain of a particular ampli- on an aluminium chassis and in-
unit. The crossover network becomes fier. corporate it into the speaker cabinet
electronic or active and is connected The interesting aspects of this cir- itself. In such, a case we only need a
between the power amplifiers and the cuit (Fig.2) are: preamplified signal.
IMPEDANCE METER
KULWANT SINGH
A
nybody working with linear lar frequency, the multimeter device PARTS LIST (for Fig. 1)
circuits in the high frequency fails, since it is basically a DC instru- Semiconductors:
range often comes across the ment. And if at all it works on AC, its IC1 741 opamp
problem of matching a tunable part of operating frequency is nominally 50 Dl OA79 or equivalent
his circuit to the operating frequency. Hz. diode
Some examples are: matching the front The meter described here is per- D2 9.1V zener diode
(see text also)
end of a receiver to the desired fre- haps the simplest device as far as con-
quency signal or, conversely, match- struction, cost and operation are con- Resistors(all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless
ing the output unit of a transmitting cerned. Yet it covers a wide range of stated otherwise):
equipment to the transmitting fre- impedances from below 10 ohms to Rl 10-kilohm
R2,R3, R4 4.7-kilohm
quency, or matching the feedline for beyond 1 kilohm quite accurately, even R5 100-ohm, 0.5 watt
high-frequency signal transmission. at sufficiently high frequencies. VR1 (Ra, Rb) 470-ohm
Numerous other problems, such as VR2 100-kilohm
those of knowing the antenna-system The principle of operation VR3 10-kilohm (linear)
impedance at a particular frequency
Capacitors:
(resonant or otherwise), establishing The device is based on the well- C1,C2 0.01F ceramic disc
the resonant frequency of a tuned cir- known bridge which is used to mea- C3 0.047F ceramic disc
cuit, measuring the characteristic im- sure accurately all ranges of resistances, C4 0.02F ceramic disc
pedance of a coaxial or flat cable or from the fraction of an ohm to the C5 0.1F ceramic disc
even of the lamp cord at a particular gegaohms range. Even the reactances,
frequency, might come up. such as inductance and capacitance, can Miscellaneous:
In a nutshell, whenever one needs be measured by this arrangement. VU meter
to know the resonant frequency, the The bridge is said to be balanced Sine wave signal
characteristic impedance of any cir- when Ra:Rb = Rc:Rx and no current generator.
cuit at resonance or any other particu- flows through the closing diagonal at
Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the impedance meter.
Since all other components, viz, poten-
tiometer and resistor in the bridge are
non-reactive to AC, only Rx introduces
any impedance to the applied RF sig-
nal. So, the impedance of Rx at the
applied frequency is determined by the
bridge in terms of the other three arms
of the bridge, directly in ohms, since
impedances of all other three arms are
in ohms. Besides, in this case, the cal-
culations are cut short by pre-calibra-
tion of the meter by using a single po-
tentiometer for Ra and Rb.
The heart of the device is a direct
Fig. 2: PCB layout for the impedance meter.
coupled amplifier, built around the fa-
miliar operational amplifier IC 741.
This DC amplifier serves three func-
tions:
1. It increases the sensitivity of the
bridge, making it more accurate and
suitable for a wider range of imped-
ances.
2. As very small RF signal of the
order of 0.25 volt rms is required, low
wattage resistances and potentiometer,
etc. can be used.
3. A small VU meter may be used
as an eye of the instrument, making a
small and compact independent unit all-
inclusive. However, an ordinary
multimeter, put in the range of 2.5 volts
or 0.25 volt, serves the purpose equally
well.
Circuit description
The bridge in its basic form is
shown in part one of the circuit dia-
gram. With a moderate RF signal of
the order of 0.5 to 1.0 volt, it works
well as such and no personal power
supply is needed.
Ra and Rb in the circuit are the two
parts of a single 470-ohm potentiom-
eter which must be linear and carbon-
film type. Of course, 220-ohm or 100-
ohm pots are still better if ones inter-
est is in measuring low impedances of
50-ohm range.
Rc, as used in the prototype, is a
100-ohm, 1/4-watt carbon resistor. This
makes the bridge most sensitive in 50-
to 200-ohm range and sufficiently accu-
rate in 5-ohm to 2-kilohm range. For
Authors prototype, including RF generator on the left 25 to 100-ohm most accurate range,
take the value of Rc as 50 ohms. (It
this stage. This is termed as null and To determine the impedance of any could be taken as 200 ohms for high-
is the precious state. Knowing Ra, Rb discrete inductive or capacitive compo- impedance type bridge.)
and Rc, the value of Rx can be deter- nent, or an LCR circuit, an RF signal is Diode Dl is BEL OA79 or any point-
mined easily through the above-men- applied to the bridge in place of a DC contact type germanium diode, such as
tioned relationship. potential required for resistive network. 1N34A. Silicon junction diode is not
advisable since it has a forward volt- 470-ohm pot, which also serves as a ited frequency range, and above all the
age drop of about 0.5 volt, thus affect- load to the. signal generator, besides nuisance of harmonics beyond rea-
ing the accuracy of the bridge and re- giving a wider range of sensitivity. This sonable limits. All such problems have
quiring a higher RF signal injection. mode is used in the prototype. been taken care of while presenting
Diode Dl rectifies the signal of the this miniature hut problem-free AF cum
unbalanced bridge and the envelope Calibration RF signal generator. The usage of coils,
potential charges up capacitor C3. The the most dreaded part of circuits, has
To make a direct-reading instru-
charged level shows up as a deflection been kept to a minimum.
ment, avoiding calculation of imped-
in the meter. A high-resistance-sensi- The circuit is a linear one, using
ance each time, one should use a single
tive galvanometer movement is re- three transistorsone each for master
linear potentiometer of 470 ohms for
quired. The circuit has been tested and oscillator, driver and output stagegiv-
Ra and Rb.
found to work satisfactorily with ordi- ing about 1-volt rms on all bands, tested
For calibration of the instrument, a
nary 175A multimeter put in the 0.25- up to 40 MHz (on a 20 MHzBW oscil-
thick white sheet of paper may be
volt range, with above 1-volt rms sig- loscope).
pasted under the 470-ohm pot.s knob.
nal infeed. The RF signal is sinusoidal, except
Switch on the power, providing a volt-
Part two of the circuit is an improve- a bit flattening of crests in the lowest
age well above the zener level. Adjust
ment over the basic bridge circuit of frequency band (below 1 MHz), which
the 10k pot. to produce null in the meter.
part one. It incorporates a DC ampli- is, of course, rarely used, except for IF
Now, move the 470-ohm pot. to its
fier stage, built around operational am- stages of AM radio where the wave-
maximum side and apply a low-ampli-
plifier IC 741, with the galvanometer form is immaterial. Harmonics are
tude RF signal of a suitable frequency.
being shifted to the output of the IC. amazingly low, even though the circuit
Since the bridge itself does not contain
The IC has been wired to operate is linear and no filters are used.
any reactive component, the supply fre-
from a single supply, stabilised to 9 The circuit fires on the very click
quency is immaterial at this stage. (Of
volts in the prototype. Zener D2s volt- of the switch, even if your coil turns
course, up to a limit, lest the circuit
age could be raised to 12V or even ratio varies within limits.
leads, etc. start producing their own
higher, keeping in mind that the power This has been achieved, first, by
appreciable inductance and capaci-
supply must always be sufficiently using a field effect transistor in place
tance.) Connect 1k resistor (preferably
higher than the stabiliser voltage. of a bipolar transistor in the oscillator
1 per cent tolerance type, at most 5 per
There is a potential divider arrange- section, second, by putting another FET
cent) for Rx and adjust 470-ohm pot.
ment, comprising resistors R3 and R4. as buffer driver through a 5pF load on
to get the null. Increase the sensitivity
A common supply of 12 volts for the the oscillator, and third, by applying
by increasing RF
signal generator and the impedance audio modulation at the collector of
signal/feedback resistance, and adjust
meter has been used. A small VU meter the output stage transistor.
the pot. for null. This is called fine
has been used to read the null position
tuning.
on the bridge. Two types of VU meter
Now, mark 1k on the paper scale, Circuit
available in the market are 400A 325-
below the knob position indicator.
ohm and 250A 1-kilohm. C1 is an AM radio insulation gang
Switch off RF and change the resistor
The 10k potentiometer VR3 meant condenser, which may even be PVC type.
to another suitable value, say 750 ohms.
for offset-null can be substituted with a Both the stator plate sections have been
Repeat the process and mark the knobs
resistor of around 1k between pin 5 and connected in parallel for broader bands.
position as 750 ohms. Carry on with
the negative line, by trial and error. For higher frequency bands, however,
lower-value resistors, like 500, 390,
The gain of the IC could be in- a single section may be used for better
250, right up to 5 ohms. Avoid long
creased, if desired, by increasing feed- spread.
series of resistor combinations, since it
back variable resistor VR2 to 470k or, L1 is one of the five fixed coils
would amount to an inductance in ad-
still better, a 470k pot. be used for a wound on readily-available 6mm plas-
dition to the resistance even at ordi-
variable gain. However, the prototype tic formers, each with four pins and a
nary frequencies, because carbon-film
has a fixed 100K feedback resistor. torroidal ferrite core. The coils could be
resistors are also toroidal conductors
All components can be mounted on selected by means of a double-pole, six-
in real sense.
the PCB itself to reduce stray capaci- way switch. But to save space and avoid
tance and inductance effects in the RF AF-RF signal generator mechanical problems, an 8-pin IC socket
stage. The 470-ohm pot. should be sol- could be accomodated in the PCB. The
dered on to the PCB. A long spindle An integral part of the impedance four pins of the formers of the coils fit
can be used to have the dial outside the meter, the RF signal generator, is oth- into the IC socket after slight bending of
cabinet. The meter can be fitted any- erwise too a necessity for everyone, the pins. Just plug in the desired coil and
where, but the prototype shows the related to the consumer as well as the you get the desired band.
meter too on the PCB itself. experimental field of electronics. Coil 1 among the set of five coils
Sensitivity control can be achieved The general problems which arise may be an ordinary MW osc. coil. Its
by the 470k feedback variable resistor. in the construction of a signal genera- output coil has seven turns, while the
It can also be achieved through a vari- tor are: a complicated circuitry, tedious input coil has about 80 turns (with the
able RF signal, injected from the sig- coil windings with strict turns ratio that middle pin cut-off) linked in series, the
nal generator by means of another small lead to non-signal generation, a lim- base fits into the IC socket. Coils 2, 3
and 4 may be wound, using 36SWG drain mode, whereas BF959 is used in Some applications
wire, while coil 5 may be wound, us- common-emitter mode.
ing 26SWG wire. The impedance meter is a versatile
Coils made with any available Audio section test instrument, whose capability can
former and almost any wire with near be utilised in various ways. Here are
about the same turns ratio as given here The audio section may be used for some of its applications:
will oscillate well; the frequency range modulating the RF carrier signal or it To determine the characteristic im-
of course will change. The length of may be used for audio gadget checking. pedance or the terminating load imped-
winding in each case should be 8 mm. IC 555 gives out square waves of ance of a transmission cable: Differ-
Excessive turns, where required, may about 1.35 kHz, with the suggested ent cables pose different impedances
be wound in layers. R10-Cl1 combination. The filter cir- to RF passing through it. This imped-
For those who desire to use 8mm cuit, comprising resistor R11 and ca- ance is independent of the signal fre-
formers, two coils with ranges given in pacitor C13, makes the wave almost quency, if the load matching is proper.
the Table (Coil Data) have been tested sawtoothed. When it is fed to the col- This fact is very important for the
with the prototype. Other coils may be lector of BF959 through C14-L2 com- selection of cable for proper signal
designed for 8mm formers, keeping in bination, it nearly resembles a sine transmission. It helps to avoid reflec-
mind the specifications for 6mm coils. wave. tion of signal from the antenna or the
The frequency ranges of the coils were The feeding of audio at the collec- input circuit back into the cable or vice
selected, so that they had frequency tor of BF959 helps in prevention of versa. If the impedance of source,
overlap and gave frequency ratios of frequency modulation and hence a pure, transmission line and load is proper, no
1:3 or. 2:5 for easy dial marking, ex- amplitude-modulated, harmonics-free signal reflection or absorption takes
cept, of course, the first coil, which RF signal is obtained. Moreover, such place in the transmission line and,
was not self-wound. a modulation is found to have no ad- above all, a transmission line of any
Diode Dl, used in the prototype, is verse effect (as compared to suitable length may be used.
OA79 germanium type. It limits the unmodulated sine wave) while using To use, connect one end of the cable
gate potential of transistor T1, the pur- with the impedance meter, which is our to the bridge at Rx position by the short-
pose being amplitude stability. Omis- main concern here. est length of leads. To the other end of
sion of Dl or use of silicon diode makes The RFC(L2) can be made by wind- the cable, connect a known resistor of
no other difference. ing about 300 turns of fine wire on a the order of 200 ohms.
Similarly, diode D2 used in the pro- 6mm or 8mm former, covering a length Feed low-amplitude RF signal of
totype is a 9.1 V zener, but it could be of 3 mm to 5 mm. With this AF-RF any frequency from the signal genera-
of any other voltage rating from 6V to combination, nearly 50 per cent modu- tor. Adjust the bridge pot. to get the
12V, the purpose being frequency sta- lation of the carrier is obtained, which null point, i.e. zero on the VU meter.
bility. The FETs are used in common- is just right for most purposes. As the reading may not be exactly zero
Fig.4: Circuit diagram for the AF-RF signal generator.
of 2.777 metres. But with the above-
mentioned theoretical lengths, nearly
150-ohm antenna system was obtained
at 27 MHz. With 5.10 metres (100-
ohm type) flexible cable feeder and
2.70 metres each of balanced 16 SWG
wire dipoles, an antenna system of only
25-ohm impedance was obtained.
A final test was done by feeding in
exactly 27.045 MHz (fixed) signal from
a small transmitter of a toy car, and the
above said impedances were confirmed.
Parallel and series tuned circuits:
Just connect the tunable circuit to the
Fig. 5: PCB layout for the AF-RF signal generator. meter (in Rx position) by short leads.
Let it be a series LC circuit. As we
know, series circuit is an acceptor type
of circuit and will provide the mini-
mum (but not zero!) impedance at reso-
nance to the signal frequency, which is
given by the relationship
1
f =
2LC
Our aim is to tune the circuit so that
it provides a minimum impedance at a
particular frequency. Feed in the de-
sired frequency low-amplitude signal.
Say we get a null point at 150-ohm
position. Move the pot. knob to a lesser
impedance position, say 100 ohms. Re-
Fig. 6: Component layout for the AF-RF signal generator. tune the circuit, by changing the in-
ductance or capacitance to come to the
due to stray effects, take the minimum cable (not necessarily an integer mul- null position again. Come down fur-
of meter as null point. tiple of half wavelength) may be used ther on the impedance scale and re-
Lets say the pot. is at 150 ohms at with the matched load. tune, and so on, till you get the mini-
null. When you vary the signal genera- Antenna and feeder matching: mum possible impedance. Increase the
tor frequency, the VU meter will show Theoretically, a half-wave dipole an- signal from the signal generator for a
variance in null position. Change the tenna, fed at the centre, by a half-wave- more pronounced null and more clear
terminating load resistance to 150 length sized feedline cable (or an inte- tuning.
ohms. Vary the frequency from signal ger multiple of the half wavelength) If the natural frequency of the al-
generator again. The meter now will gives a proper antenna system with the ready tuned circuit is to be established,
not move from its minimum position. minimum impedance. But, practically, connect as usual and vary the frequency
(You might have to change a bit of a bit less is required for proper match- from the generator till you have the
resistance further but generally you get ing. minimum possible reading on the im-
the matching in the very first instance.) To ascertain this fact, connect the pedance scale. A final reading should
Now at this position your imped- input of the antenna system (free end always be taken with elevated signal
ance meter reads 150 ohms with any of feedline cable) to the impedance feed.
length of the cable and at almost any meter at Rx position. Feed low-ampli- Further, we know a parallel tuned
frequency, with a load of 150 ohms tude RF and rotate the bridge pot. to circuit is a rejector circuit, as it pro-
itself, and your cable is posing practi- get the null. The bridge reading gives vides the maximum impedance to the
cally zero resistance to the signal. This the antenna system
COIL DATA
150 ohms is the characteristic imped- impedance directly.
ance of the cable, i.e. this cable will As an example, Ciol Turns Former Descrp. Band Limits
No. (1-2):(2-3)
match exactly into 150-ohm load. 27MHz frequency an-
It will be found that a flat TV cable tenna system should 1 AM osc. coil 10 mm IFT 0.4 to 1.2 MHz
2 15:150 6mm, Full core 0.55 to 1.8 MHz
gives the free null point with 300-ohm require 5.555 metres 3 10:60 6mm, Full core 1.6 to 5.5 MHz
impedance while the round coaxial of feeder cable (of any 4 06:20 6mm, Halfcore 4 to 15 MHz
cable has 75-ohm impedance. Imped- characteristic imped- 5 05:8.5 6mm, Halfcore 10 to 38 MHz
ance matching of cable is important ance) feeding into a 1(i) 10:40 6mm, Full core 1.8 to 6.0 MHz
2(i) 06:15 6mm, Half core 5.4 to 18 MHz
because then any suitable length of the. dipole with each arm
PARTS LIST (for Fig. 4) gave an impedance of 2000 ohms when 600 H.)
Semiconductors:
the same very components were put in Now, you can calibrate your meter
IC1 555 of any series parallel, at proper resonance. for various inductances and capaci-
D1 OA79 detector diode In rejection type circuits, the VU tances at Rx position, as you did for
D2 9.1V zener diode meter does not read zero exactly, due resistances. Of course, the scale will
TI,T2 BFW10 (BEL) to reflected feed signals. be direct for inductances and inverse
T3 BF959 (BEL)
Tuning the output filter circuit: To for capacitors.
Resistors (all 1/4watt, 5% carbon unless the output end of the filter circuit, con- As mentioned earlier, the VU meter
stated otherwise): nect a properly selected load resistor may not read exactly zero in this case
R1,R2 100-kilohm of the same value, as that of the an- too.
R3,R4,R5 470-ohm tenna system or the load to be con- Check yourself the functioning of
R6 27-kilohm
R7 330-ohm
nected. It should be of suitable wattage balun: The input of a TV set has 75-
R8 10-ohm (generally 50 ohms or else as required ohm input impedance. But we gener-
R9 1-kilohm by the circuit design). Connect the in- ally use 300-ohm antenna, with a 300-
R10 2.2-kilohm put end of the filter circuit to the im- ohm flat cable. Sometimes, 75-ohm co-
R11 220-ohm pedance meter (at Rx position). Apply axial cable is used. Let us see how a
R12 47-ohm
VR1 1-kilohm pot. low-amplitude RF signal of the desired balun converts impedances in such
frequency and obtain null. Move the cases.
Capacitors: knob to the desired impedance posi- Connect 75-ohm end of the balun
C1 2J air gang tion, the same as that of the terminat- to the impedance meter. To the other
C3, C4, C11 0.1F ceramic disc
ing load (50-ohm position or else), and (300-ohm) end of the balun, connect a
C5 5pF ceramic disc tune the filter circuit (through core or 300-ohm resistor directly or with a
C6,C7,C8,C12 0.01F ceramic disc capacitor, as the case may be) till you piece of (300-ohm) flat cable. You will
C9,C10 47F, 25V electrolytic get your meter to the null position again. see that your bridge nulls at 75-ohm
C13 0.47F ceramic disc Increase the signal level for an exact position, although the terminating re-
C14 4.7F, 25V electrolytic
and final tuning. Now, your filter cir- sistor is of 300 ohms. It means the
Miscellaneous: cuit poses the minimum possible resis- balun has converted the impedance
Sl 1-pole, 2-way switch tance at the desired frequency and the from 300 ohms to 75 ohms.
Coil 1 (L1) One of the 5 coils (please stipulated operating load, and hence has Conversely, connect the 300-ohm
refer text)
L2 300 turns of fine copper
the best filtering efficiency. end of the balun to the meter. Now, you
wire on 6 or 8mm dia Some more interesting applications will see that you have to connect 75-
former. of the impedance meter are suggested ohm resistor to the other end of the
Output jacks etc. below, but you may try others yourself. balun, directly or through a piece of
Measuring L and C: A bridge can 75-ohm coaxial cable to get the null
tuned frequency. So, you have to go in measure (in fact compare) inductances position on the impedance meter at 300-
for the maximum possible impedance and capacitances. But our present meter ohm position, thus showing that the
in this case. Rest of the procedure re- has diminished accuracy due to the balun has converted the impedance
mains the same. presence of filtering capacitors C3 and from 75 to 300 ohms.
A 27MHz tuned circuit, with in- C4, following the basic bridge circuit.
ductor and capacitor in series, and the The way out is: replace 100-ohm resis-
secondary open, was tuned by core, tor Rc with a fixed inductor. (For ex-
and the impedance was found to be 5 ample, an ordinary radio IFT, without
ohms at resonance. The same circuit capacitor, has an inductance of around
INTERRUPTION
COUNTER CUM BURGLAR
ALARM
S.S. CHENDAKE
N
ow-a-days the electronic digi-
tal interruption counter is very
popular. It counts and records
automatically the number of objects
passing on a conveyor belt or the people
entering or leaving any place through a
particular gate (permitting only one-
way entry). The interruption of light
beam in this circuit is counted in two
digitsup to 99.
The burglar alarm provides an
inexpensive yet effective form of
protection against intruders. When
the invisible ray of light is interrupted
momentarily by any person, the alarm
rings up to indicate entry of some
unidentified person. The alarm stops
automatically after a preset time Authors prototype
period.
Such burglar alarms are widely used parator) and an npn transistor. The com- of detector stage.
in homes, banks and offices as a secu- parator switches from low to high state The two-way selector switch en-
rity measure. This compact and por- whenever the incident light on the ables one to use the gadget as either an
table gadget is easy to operate and can phototransistor is interrupted, produc- interruption counter or a burglar alarm.
be set up in minutes. ing a clock pulse at the collector of npn When the selector switch is at position
The circuit can be easily understood transistor. These pulses are the output A, the counter converts the clock
by dividing it into seven
sub-units, as shown in Fig.
1. Two very important
sub-units are source and
detector, which are com-
mon to bothinterruption
counter and burglar alarm.
The source has an
LED, which emits the in-
visible infrared light,
when a small DC voltage
is applied across it. This
light beam is made to fall
on the phototransistor in-
side the detector stage.
The detector also has an
op-amp (used as com- Fig. 1: Block diagram for 2-digit interruption counter cum burglar alarm.
Fig.2: Circuit diagram for the interruption counter cum burglar alarm.
pulses into BCD and its equivalent deci- is the phototransistor. Although the IR Similarly, the output of ICl becomes
mal number is displayed on the 7-seg- light beam is invisible, it behaves like low when voltage at its non-inverting
ment display. ordinary light and is focused on the terminal is slightly lesser than voltage
When the selector switch is at posi- phototransistor by using a convex lens. at the inverting terminal. The
tion B, the clock pulses at the detec- When IR light beam is focused on comparators output changes from high
tor output are given to the timer, used phototransistor Tl, the resistance of T1 to low or from low to high, with small
in a monostable mode to switch the becomes low. Hence, the voltage across changes of a few millivolts at its input
timer output high. This high output resistor R2 increases. An op-amp (IC1) terminals.
starts the alarm and the ion-buzzer os- is used in the circuit as a comparator. When output of IC1 becomes high,
cillates, producing a pleasant sound. A When the IR light stops falling on it gives sufficient base bias to drive
precise 5-volt power supply is recom- phototransistor Tl, the resistance of npn transistor T2 to conduction through
mended for the circuit. phototransistor becomes very high. In diode Dl and resistor R3. Since Dl is
this state, Tl and R2 act as a resistive forward biased, it conducts only when
Circuit operation voltage divider at the inverting termi- output of IC1 is high. Resistor R4 keeps
nal of the comparator (IC1). With re- transistor T2 off when output of IC1
The heart of the source stage is an sistance of Tl being very high, the volt- goes low.
infrared (IR)-LED. The source is used age at inverting terminal is very low. When the IR radiation is incidental
to emit infrared light, using a small DC Using variable resistance VR1 (preset), on transistor Tl, its resistance decreases.
voltage since the IR-LED requires a the voltage at non-inverting terminal This increases the voltage drop across
very small current (about few mA). of comparator is so adjusted that it is resistor R2 sufficiently to change the
Thus, series resistor Rl is used as a slightly greater than the voltage at in- output of IC1 from high to low state,
current limiting resistor. verting terminal. As a result, the output and so transistor T2 turns off. Thus,
The main part of the detector stage of IC1 becomes high. the collector of T2 becomes more posi-
Fig. 3: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.
tive through resistor R5. No current

flows through LED2 and it remains
off. When LED2 turns on, it indi-
cates that the IR beam has been inter-
rupted.
When IR beam is interrupted mo-
mentarily, as explained earlier, the out-
put of IC1 becomes high and transistor
T2 starts conducting. Thus, collector
of T2 is grounded for a moment, LED2
lights up momentarily and a clock pulse
is produced at point C. Each time the
IR light is interrupted, another clock
pulse (square shaped) is produced at
the collector of transistor T2.
When selector switch S1 is at posi-
tion A, the pulses produced at collec-
tor of T2 indicate the number of inter-
ruptions through the counter chain for
counting and displaying the actual
count digitally.
The first decade counter IC4 pro-
cesses the pulses and gives a binary
Inside view of authors prototype
output to IC6 which drives a 7-seg-
Fig. 5: PCB layout for the display. Fig. 6: Component layout for the display.
ment, common-anode display and pulse, the combined display shows 00. 99.
shows the corresponding decimal num- The pushbutton switch S2 resets the The number of digits can be in-
ber. After counting up to 9, the tenth circuit and returns the display to 00. creased by cascading more counters
pulse overflows to IC3, whose output Hence, the maximum number with decoder drivers and displays, to
goes to IC5 that drives another 7-seg- of interruptions that can be counted show a larger number of interruptions.
ment display. The two displays together is 10n-1, where n is number of digits. When selector switch Sl is moved
enable a count of up to 99. On 100th So, in this case the number is 102-1, i.e. to B, capacitor Cl being initially dis-
PARTS LIST
Semiconductors:
IC1 CA741 op-amp
IC2 NE555 timer
IC3,IC4 74LS90 decade counter
IC5,IC6 74LS247 BCD to 7-
segment decoder display
driver
IC7 LM7805, +5V voltage
regulator
T1 TIL81 phototransistor
T2 BC148 npn transistor
LED1 Infrared light emitting
diode
LED3,LED4 5mm general-purpose LED
D1 IN4148 switching diode
B1 PB27 ion buzzer
DIS1,DIS2 LTS542 common-anode
display
LED2 D.P. of DIS-1 display
Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless

stated otherwise):
Rl 220-ohm
R2 6.8-kilohm
R3 2.7-kilohm
R4, R5,
R8, R10 1-kilohm
R6, R7 10-kilohm
R9 270-ohm
R11 to R24 330-ohm
R25, R26 680-ohm
VR1 4.7-kilohm preset
VR2 220-kilohm preset
Capacitors:
C1,C5,C6,C8 0.1F ceramic disc
C3 l0F, 16V electrolytic
Miscellaneous:
Fig. 7: Wiring diagram. X1 230V AC primary to 12V,
500mA sec. transformer
F1 Fuse with holder
PCB-1 PCB for components
PCB-2 PCB for display
S1 SPDT switch
S2 Push-to-on switch
S3 SPST switch
J1,J2 Jumper wires
IC sockets, DIL (two 8-pin,
two 14-pin and two 16-pin)
LED holder
Heatsink for IC7 (TO-220
package)
Convex lens and plane
Fig. 8: IR-LED and phototransistor arrangement. glass
Nut bolts and screws
charged, trigger pin 2 of IC2 gets Vcc put of IC2 goes low and the buzzer Wooden cabinets (three)
through resistor R6. When the light stops producing sound. If another inter-
beam is interrupted by someone, the ruption takes place, the alarm again IC2 has been eliminated, the circuits
output of IC1 becomes high and pro- rings for a few seconds and stops overall cost gets reduced.
duces a pulse at the collector of T2. automatically, ready for the next inter-
This pulse triggers IC2 through capaci- ruption. Power supply
tor C1 and makes its output high. This The current consumption of the
output is given directly to the ion- alarm circuit being only a few milli- Power supply for the ciruit is very
buzzer which produces a pleasant alarm amperes, IC2 can easily withstand this simple as it requires only +5 volts. It
sound. After a preset interval, the out- load. As use of relay at the output of uses step-down transformer X1 to re-
Fig. 9: Front panel layout. Fig. 10: Back view of the cabinet.
duce mains voltage to 12 volts, diodes the regulated voltage remains within power supply.
D2 through D5 for converting AC volt- 4.5 to 5.5 volts. The IR-LED and phototransistor
age to DC, capacitors C4 through C7 can be fitted on either side of the con-
for filtering the DC and 3-terminal posi- Installation veyor belt or the entrance gate (about
tive voltage regulator (IC7) for a con- 90 cms above ground level). Convex
stant voltage. C5, C6 and C8 also act To simplify installation, the unit lens may be used to focus the IR light
as surge capacitors. LED4 monitors the may be split up into three parts: (a) beam on phototransistor. The box, con-
working of the circuit. source of light, (b) phototransistor, taining the rest of the circuit, may be
Since TTL ICs require a regulated and (c) the rest, comprising detector, kept elsewhere.
power supply, it should be ensured that counter, timer with alarm, display and
Readers Comments:
The author may please clarify some of
my doubts:
Can a 6V stepdown transformer be
used, instead of a 12V transformer?
How could this project be used as
a burglar alarm and interruption counter
together? Can it be used by connecting
the points B and C together with point
A?
What should be the maximum dis-
tance between the IR transmitter and
the receiver?
Could the buzzer be replaced with
a speaker?
Sandeep Mathur
Delhi
In the counter there are two ICs used
to drive one display and a total of 4 ICs The author, Shamsundar Chendake, counter.
for the two displays. This will make replies: The maximum distance between the
the PCB more complicated which will As explained in my article, TTL IR transmitter and the receiver should
thus cost more. Instead of using ICs ICs require regulated +5V supply. If be 2.4 metres, but if you install another
74LS247 (BCD to decimal decoder) voltage across TTL ICs increases be- convex lens at IR diode (LED1) the
and a 7-segment display for counter 1, yond 5.5 volts the ICs will get dam- distance can be increased up to 7.6
only a CD4033 can be used for one aged, and if voltage falls below metres.
display. It has both decade counter as 4 volts the ICs will not give proper The buzzer may be replaced after
well as BCD to decimal decoder and performance. Thus, this project needs this modification as shown.
in-built circuit, limiting resistors and regulated voltage and the input volt- Here IC 555 is used as a stable
drives a common-cathode 7-segment age (through the regulator) must multivibrator which produces 1kHz au-
display, thus reducing the size and cost be 3 volts higher than the output volt- dio tone at its output.
of the PCB. age. IC CD4033 (or CD4026) can be
R. Sasidhara Reddy This circuit can be used both used instead of two ICs (7490 and
Bangalore as burglar alarm as well as interruption 74247).
SECTION B:
CIRCUIT IDEAS
92 ELECTRONICS PROJECTS
DIGITAL EVEN AND ODD PARITY
CHECKER/GENERATOR
J.P. SHARMA
T his circuit checks and generates

even and odd parity of nine in-
put signals. It is wired around IC
output is low. The sum odd output
is the complement of the sum even out-
put.
7404 ICs to provide alternate light of
bicolour LED. IC1 accepts nine inputs.
Its outputs are obtained at the fifth pin as
74HC280. The input signals are applied by even and at the sixth pin as odd. Diodes
The 74HC280 is a high-speed par- closing switches S1 to S9, which is D1 and D2 and display LTS-543 are
ity generator/checker that accepts nine indicated and confirmed by red light used to show E (even) and O (odd),
bits of input data and detects whether of the bicolour LEDs. Absence of according to the sum of input signals.
an even or an odd parity exists, and logic high input signals is ensured by Red light of bicolour LED is considered
whether these inputs are high. If an opening of switches S1 to S9, indi- for total logic high inputs to decide
even number of inputs is high, the sum cated and confirmed by green light of parity signal at the output. This circuit
even output is high. If an odd number the bicolour LEDs. works well off 4.5V DC supply for any
of inputs is high, the sum even N1 to N9 are the inverting gates of combination of input signals.
Resistors R10 to R16 limit the cur- may be decreased by increasing the se- is tapped off pins 5 and 6, it is used as
rent to display. Luminosity of display ries resistance or vice versa. If output parity generator.
SW BOOSTER FOR DXERS

PRADEEP G.
A mateur Radio enthusiasts and

shortwave listeners will find this
circuit very useful. Using the circuit,
even weak shortwave stations can be
heard clearly through an ordinary SW
radio set. The circuit should be con-
nected between the antenna and re-
ceiver. The RF signals picked up by
the antenna are first amplified by this
booster and then fed to the receiver.
The circuit is a single-stage, com-
mon-source amplifier built around BEL
dual-gate MOSFET 3N200. Any other
similar MOSFET can also be used.
L1 is a shortwave antenna coil used
for radio receivers. Commercially avail-
able coils with movable ferrite beads
(slug-tuned types) can be used.
The RFC coil may be wound on used for this booster but it should be while soldering the MOSFET. Before
resistor R4 with thin enamelled (40 well filtered. Otherwise, use a 9-volt, soldering, all the leads of MOSFET
SWG) copper wire of 180 turns. Use PP3 battery. As the current consump- should be short-circuited with a cop-
a 1-watt resistor as R4 for conve- tion of this circuit is very low, the bat- per wire. Shorting should be removed
nience. tery life will be long. only after completing the assembly of
Receivers 9-volt supply can be Necessary care should be taken the unit.
INTERCOM FOR YOUR HOME

IYER MAHESH NAGARAJAN
I ntercom systems are becoming

increasingly popular these days.
Persons having big bungalows with ga-
the condenser microphone is first fed
to the base of transistor amplifier Tl,
via volume control VR1. The audio sig-
ground level. X1 is an output-match-
ing transformer of the type commonly
used in radio sets.
rages, or a flat with several rooms, of- nals from transistor Tl to T2, T2 to T3 The circuit is powered by 9V bat-
ten prefer an intercom set. So, here is and T3 to T4 are coupled by capacitors tery.
one to fulfil such requirements. Cl, C2 and C3, each of 10 microfarads. After assembly, power the unit and
This intercom is designed to ensure Resistors R1-R2, R3-R4, R8-R9 and slide the switch to Talk-Listen posi-
privacy in conversation. It basically R12-R13 determine the base bias to tion. Now, talk through microphone
consists of a 4-stage transistor ampli- transistors T1,T2,T3 and T4. Resistors MIC.1 and listen through loudspeaker
fier. R5, R7, Rll and R14 act as emitter LS1. If you want to listen through
When a sets DPDT switch is in stabilisers. Capacitors C4, C5, C6 and loudspeaker LS2 and talk through mi-
Talk-Listen mode, the audio signal from C7 bypass spurious distortions to the crophone MIC.2, slide the switch to
Listen-Talk position. The wiring be- out with a shielded cable. for other applications, e.g., as a baby
tween two rooms should be carried This intercom unit can also be used alarm to monitor the babys move-
ments.
SLAVE SWITCH
P.K. MISHRA
W hile using a computer, both the

monitor and the CPU have to be
switched on or off. The same is the
case while using a VCR with a TV.
This low-cost circuit switches off the
slave (monitor or TV) when the master
(computer CPU or VCR) is switched
off, provided the two are being pow-
ered through the slave and master sock-
ets respectively in this circuit.
Whenever a load (equipment)
is connected to the master socket
in circuit, the voltage developed across
the load resistor R8 saturates transis-
tor T1. At the same time, the
AC mains voltagerectified by diode
D1 and reduced by resistors R1
and R2gets applied to transistor
T1. This voltage saturates transistor T2
also and thus helps to switch the SCR
on.
Coil L1 is made by winding 9 turns
of 36 SWG enamelled copper wire on
a 10mm dia. ferrite rod. It helps to filter the spurious waveforms to pro- a proper heatsink.
protect the circuit against radio inter- tect the SCR from high-voltage tran- The circuit costs around Rs 25
ference. Capacitor C4 and resistor R6 sients. The SCR should be mounted on only.
MORSE INTERPULSE TIME

PERIOD COUNTER
KULJEET SINGH
A person learning Morse code

knows the importance of time gap
between words. This time should be
The circuit given here enables one
to check this timing. It can count time
from 0.01 to 0.8 seconds. Generally,
The circuit is intended for use with
a tape recorder. The Morse signals are
recorded on an audio cassette and then
nearly the same throughout the trans- the time between two words never ex- replayed. This circuit is connected to
mission of the Morse pulses. ceeds 0.8 seconds. the tape recorder, with a wire taken
from the extra speaker connection. tain specific time. Note: On connecting pin 9 of IC
The circuit detects the audio sig- The circuit skips off the gaps between 4538 to pins 1 and 7 of both 4543 ICs,
nals and produces a square waveform two characters as these are too small. the display works in latched mode. The
accordingly. A time-base produces For this purpose, a timer is incorporated, display in normal condition will be
l00Hz pulses, which are fed to a which is triggered by each positive go- blank, except for a dot (dp) on the left
counter, after resetting it. As soon as a ing pulse. If the next pulse arrives be- side digit. This circuit displays the peak
pulse disappears, the counter keeps fore its time period, that pulse will not value of the time lapsed between two
counting until the next pulse is received. be acknowledged. This time period can successive words (not letters) of the
Then it displays the count for a fixed be set by preset VR1 and depends on the Morse signals. It displays that peak
short period. In normal condition, only code-sending speed. The time for which value for a while, but internally, it starts
a dot in the deci-second display gets the display holds the counted time can counting the next time period, since
illuminated, and the whole display re- be adjusted by VR2. Generally, 0.2 sec- the two 4543 ICs are used in the latched
mains off. The display starts glowing onds are sufficient. The time is shown in mode. That is why the display does not
only when the gap is more than a cer- deci-seconds. glow all the time.
AMPLIFIER TACITURNER
AMRIT BIR TIWANA
M ore often than not, one hears the

door-bell ring when the audio
rack is turned up to its maximum vol-
make two of its four used gates to
function as inverters with a hysteris
level acting at the inputs. When the
audio amplifier inputs, the amplifiers
volume is dropped to zero for that pe-
riod. This is indicated by the LED.
ume range, causing inconvenience to bell (mains-operated) rings, a parallel The circuit can be used with am-
the visitors. In case you are concerned connection input sends a voltage plifiers running at up to 60 volts; for
about this, this simple circuit will aptly through the voltage dropper compo- higher voltage types, transistors Tl and
solve the problem by turning the vol- nents Dl, D2, Rl, R2 and Cl. These T2 should be replaced by higher volt-
ume to nearly zero level the moment it apply a 9-volt DC pulse at the input age devices.
hears the door-bell ring, and then back of gate N2, which triggers gate Nl, The current intake of the circuit be-
again to its normal level after an ad- whose output goes high for a time pe- ing very low, the need for a separate
justable time gap. riod, depending upon the setting of power supply will never arise. The cir-
The circuit is based on a fairly VR1. As long as the output remains cuit can also be tailored to suit the
overused quad CMOS inverter high, the two transistors remain con- amplifiers power supply by varying
CD4093, whose inputs are wired to ducting. As these are connected to the the ratings of resistor R3 and zener D3.
REMOTE AUDIO LEVEL INDICATOR
RAJESH L. CHHABRIA
T he normal level-indicator circuits

which are available in the market
require connections to be made to the
output of the player, which may not be
easily accessible. The circuit described
here removes this restriction as it may
be placed close to the players speak-
ers and yet the desired effect can be
realised.
As shown in the circuit, signals are
picked up by the condenser micro-
phone, which get further amplified by
the non-inverting amplifier built around
one of the four op-amps of LM324.
The remaining three, along with four
op-amps of the second LM324, are used
as seven comparators to work as the
level detector, giving seven output lev-
els through seven coloured LEDs.
The sensitivity of the circuit may
be improved by varying the 220k po-
tentiometer. If a fine adjustment is de-
sired, a 4.7-kilohm potentiometer may
be connected in series with the 220k
potentiometer.
SIMPLE KARAOKE CIRCUIT

L. SRIDHAR
C ostlier audio systems generally

have sing along facility now-
adays. Generally, all these circuits em-
used for the stereo version. The fan-
in facility of op-amp 741 is employed.
This circuit is to be connected in be-
quired, it should be attenuated. For this
purpose, a potmeter (VR1) is provided.
Transistor T2 is meant for micro-
ploy a simple mixer, which accepts tween a cassette player and a cassette phone. The value of resistor R18 lies
head signal from a recorder as well as recorder. between 4.7-kilohm and 22-kilohm, de-
a microphone signal simultaneously. Recording output or external ter- pending upon the sensitivity of the mi-
Familiar songs enable us to sing in such minal of cassette player A is to be used. crophone. The passive network is for
a way that the singers voice in the As the output from the terminal is suf- an auxiliary input, such as a keyboard.
recording is eliminated. ficient for recording, it need not be The op-amp is built in the buffer
This circuit utilises easily available further amplified. Hence, an emitter fol- mode. Output from the op-amp is to be
components and its performance is re- lower is constructed, using transistor maintained at the recording level. Pre-
ally satisfactory. Only mono version T1. set VR4 is set by trial and error to get
has been given here. A replica can be If the output level is more than re- undistorted recording. Output from
VR4 is fed into the input of tape B, In the stereo version, by maintaining an sistor R18 had been used for bias-
kept in the recording mode. effective control over the inputs, actual ing of the condenser microphone.
A very good power supply with stereophonic effects can be produced. However, if one inserts a dynamic
least ripple level should be used to mic., it may get damaged due to
energise the circuit. Tmhe signal-carry- the current flowing through R18.
ing wires should be good-quality Authors Comments: So, before using a dynamic mic-
shielded cables to avoid noise pick-up. In my circuit for Karaoke System re- rophone, resistor R18 should be re-
moved.
TRANSISTORISED WALKMAN
RADIO PLAYER
PRADEEP G.
A fully transistorised circuit is

given here for a walkman radio
player. The circuit comprises a single
stage is made with BEL 187 and 188
matched pair. 250mW power can be
obtained at 3-volt supply with this
tion. The radio stage is common for
both channels. Use high-quality
shielded wire for the tapes play head
transistor RF stage, a two-stage head amplifier. and the volume controls. The length of
preamplifier and a four-stage main The outputs of the head preampli- these wires should be as short as pos-
amplifier. The entire circuit is devel- fier and the RF stage are selected by a sible.
oped for 3-volt operation, meant to two-pole, two-way slide switch and Connect the motor to supply rails
be used with compact walkman given to the main amplifier through through the leaf switch of the mecha-
mechanisation. the volume control. nism. The motor will be operated only
The circuit employs seven cheap This circuit has comparatively good when the Play, R/W or F/W switch is
silicon transistors. The head preampli- sensitivity for the local MW stations. operated.
fier is the popular two-stage npn-pnp In the circuit, only one channel is Use a separate on/off switch for bat-
DC amplifier. shown. tery. Otherwise, the switch of the vol-
The main amplifier is a four-stage, All stages, except the RF stage, ume control can be used.
direct-coupled amplifier. The output should be made twice for stereo opera- As already stated, this circuit can

deliver 250 mW power into each chan- The specifications of the coils (Ll- over the ferrite bar.
nel. So, instead of a headphone, mini- L3) used are : L3 Philips interstage (IFT) with-
speakers can also be used. LI 100 turns of 42SWG enam- out parallel capacitor. (Primary wind-
For on/off indication, a red LED elled copper wire on flat ferrite bar. ing only.)
with a 470-ohm resistor can be con- L2 10 turns of 42SWG enam- The switch connections are also
nected across the power supply lines. elled copper wire near top end of L1 shown in the circuit.
SAFETY CIRCUIT FOR

INSTANT WATER HEATER
H.M MARUTHI RAO RAYKAR
I nstant water heater is a very useful

household device. Inside its attrac-
tive body, there is a metal container
outlet pipes should be connected prop-
erly. There is no protection to the heater
coil, if there is an inlet water flow fail-
for each probe.
The circuit has a single-stage ampli-
fier built around transistor Tl, which
with an insulated heater coil. Inlet and ure, owing to the pipes being reverse operates relay RL1. When switch Sl is
outlet water pipes are fixed to the con- connected or otherwise. This can dam- turned on, step-down transformer X1
tainer. A thermostat is placed outside age the heater coil. provides 12-volt AC. This is rectified
towards the top of the container to pro- Here is a unique circuit to protect by diodes Dl and D2, filtered by ca-
tect the gadget against excessive tem- the heating coil. Two probes are pacitor Cl and applied to the base of
perature. fixed inside the container, just 2.5 cms transistor Tl through water probes. Posi-
The circuit needs a continuous flow above the coil through an insulated tive voltage to its base passes through
of water while working. The inlet and watertight tube with a gap of 7.5 cms resistor Rl and the water probe, tran-

sistor Tl conducts and the relay LED indicates safe working. As the One set of contacts is used for indica-
energises. Diode D3 and capacitor C2 water falls down below the probe level, tion and another for heater supply.
are connected in parallel to relay RL1 due to absence of base voltage to Tl, When relay is de-energised, the red
to avoid chattering of the relay. Resis- the transistor stops conducting, and the LED indicates that there is no water
tor R2 is used to limit the current flow relay de-energises. The heater is turned inside the container.
to LEDs. off. The circuit can be built on a small
The heater coil gets supply through In this circuit, 12-volt, 250-ohm re- general-purpose PCB, housed in a small
the relays N/O contacts. The green lay with 10-amp DPDT contacts is used. metal box, fixed very close to the equip-
ment.
LONG DURATION SEQUENTIAL

TIMER WITH IC MM5387
A.U. AHMED
W ith the addition of the circuit

described here, your digital
clock, built around IC MM5387, can
The circuit becomes operational
only when switch Sl is in position 3.
Precisely at the alarm set time, a mo-
is also provided with the necessary
high state to display the countdown
process. At the end of the duration,
be used to automatically switch on an mentary high state of alarm output trig- IC2, triggered by the negative going
electrical appliance at the alarm set gers IC1, which is wired as a pulse edge, triggers the tone genera-
time. It can also be used to switch it monostable multivibrator. IC1s output tor IC 555 for approximately one
off after a certain time duration, ad- pulse is used to set the internal sleep minute. However, an alarm reset push-
justable between 1 and 59 minutes. counter of the clock IC by providing button switch is also provided. Manual
The circuit also features display of the necessary high state to the sleep dis- on and off switches are provided to
countdown (in minutes) to the comple- play input and fast set input simulta- facilitate manual operation. With
tion of the process, which is an- neously. The pulse length, and hence switch Sl in position 1, the clock func-
nounced by a self-resetting audible the sleep counter setting, is adjustable tions as usual.
alarm. So, it can prove very useful by potentiometer VR2. To calibrate VR1 and VR2, keep
for the automatic operation of a vari- The resulting high sleep output is switch Sl in position 2. In this mode,
ety of electrical appliances, such as used to drive the relay through tran- the circuit can be test-operated with-
heater, geyser, TV, VCR, etc. sistors T2 and T3. Sleep display input out disturbing the relay output. Now,

keep VR2 at its zero-resistance ror. Similarly, keeping VR2 at its maxi- manual on/off switches in the test
position. Adjust VR1 and press the mum-resistance position, adjust VR4 mode.
manual on switch to get the sleep for a setting of one minute. VR2s dial The relay output can drive low-
counter setting displayed. Then press may be marked accordingly. However, power loads like TV and VCR directly.
the manual off switch briefly to try while setting the timer for However, the optional circuit to drive
again. Achieve the required maximum real operation, it is advisable to cross- loads with higher power rating is
setting of 59 minutes by trial and er- check VR2 dial-setting by operating also given.

TELEPHONE SILENCER
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
S uppose you are in the bathroom or

enjoying a TV program while your
telephone is ringing. Someone is call-
your telephone set in the telephone line
when you press switch Sl. The load
gets disconnected after a preset time.
contact points. So, releasing switch S3
will not disconnect circuit from the sup-
ply. Another contact point of the relay
ing you on your phone. This is a very The load forces the telephone exchange is used to apply a resistive load on the
irritating situation. Perhaps you lift the to think that the line is busy. So, any- telephone line. A bridge rectifier is used
telephone handset off the cradle and body trying to get your number will to avoid the problem of polarity. The
put it on the table to avoid this kind of receive a busy tone. The time period LED should glow, indicating that the
situation. But there is a chance you can be adjusted according to ones silencer is working. The value of Rl
may forget to place the handset back choice. may be changed to suit different tele-
on the cradle. This simple circuit solves The heart of the circuit is a 555 IC, phone lines.
this problem. which is wired in one-shot monostable The time interval is set by switch
Connect this gadget to your tele- on-timer configuration. On pressing S1 to 5, 10, 20 or 40 minutes. After this
phone line. Press a switch whenever switch S3, the IC gets power through time, the line will be normal. Switch
you want to disconnect your line. The the switch. At the same time, a nega- S2 is used to reset the circuit. After the
telephone will get reconnected after tive-going pulse is applied to the trig- time interval set, the circuit will get
a preset time, set by switch S1. Any- ger pin of 555 through another part of disconnected from the supply, causing
body trying to call you during this switch S3. So, the timer starts work- no power consumption. A 9V battery
period will get a busy tone in his tele- ing, making the output pin high. As a may be used to power the circuit.
phone. result, relay RL1 energises. The circuit can be housed in a small
The basic idea of this circuit is that On energising relay RL1, the cir- box. Use miniature relay to save space.
it puts a resistive load equal to that of cuit gets its power through one of its Transistor Tl needs a good heatsink.
S1
TIME
SELECTOR
1-POLE
4-WAY
SWITCH
R2
1K
S2
RESET
SWITCH
C3
1000
25V
TO
TELEPHONE
LINES
BRIDGE
RECTIFIER

CONTROL CIRCUIT
FOR IN / OUT COUNTER
BHASKAR BANNERJEE
T he following is a reliable and

easy-to-build transistorised control
circuit for In / Out counter. There are
LDR2 are simultaneously obstructed,
relays RL1 and RL2 get energised and
finally activate relay RL3, through tran-
capacitor C3 gets charged. Similarly,
when RL2 gets energised, it connects
the base of transistor T7 to the emit-
various object counters available, but sistors T5-T9. ter of transistor T6, and thus T7 is bi-
they cannot be used for simultaneous The LDR-controlled relay circuit is ased. This activates transistor T8, and
in and out counting. In most cases, there very simple. Here, only potentiome- T8 biases transistor T9 through relay
is only one door for entrance and exit, ters VR1 and VR2 are adjusted for a R5. Finally, relay RL3 is energised.
so false counting is likely. The circuit better triggering of the LDRs. When The on-time of RL3 is about seven to
presented here solves the problem. LDR1 and LDR2 are obstructed, the eight seconds and depends on the val-
The circuit, built around transistors respective relays RL1 and RL2 get en- ues of resistor R3 and R4. An LDR-
Tl through T4 and the LDRs, controls ergised at once. When RL1 gets ener- controlled object counter may be con-
the relay circuit. When LDR1 and gised, T5 is biased. T5 biases T6 and nected to RL3, which acts as the On/

Off switch for the counter. represent the lights and LDRs for the close, so that a single-light source may
If the persons entering are to be entry counter, while LX and RX rep- be used.
counted, then only one circuit is neces- resent the lights and LDRs for the exit The advantage of this circuit is that,
sary. But when the persons entering counter. if RE2 or RX2 or RE3 (LDRs of the
and leaving are both to be counted, If you want to keep LE3, RE3 and counter-circuit) or RX3 is obstructed
then two such circuits are needed. You LX3, RX3 in separate places, then in- first, relay RL3 will remain off. Thus,
must be careful about the settings of crease the on-time of the relay RL3 by false counting is prevented.
the lights and the LDRs. LE1 and RE1 increasing the values of resistors R3 The circuit can be constructed on a
of the entry counter should come first and R4. Be sure that a person takes veroboard or a general-purpose PCB.
when a person enters, then come LE2, lesser time than the on-time of relay If possible, use lenses for perfect and
RE2 and LE3, RE3. On the other hand, RL3 to reach that point. For conve- accurate operation. The light must be
LX1 and RX1 are chosen first, when a nience, keep the distance shorter and focussed just on the LDRs. Low-cost
person exits. This is shown in the dia- on-time of RL3 higher. Keep LEI, LE2, lenses available in the market can be
gram below the circuit. LE and RE RE1, RE2 and LX1, LX2, RX1, RX2 used without hesitation.
LOW-COST PULSE GENERATOR

MUKESH AMBWANI
H ere is a low-cost pulse generator

with four independent controls for
pulse, i.e. On and Off periods and On
TON, TOFF, VON and VOFF from the
following equations:
TON = VR1 x C
supply of up to +30V or dual supply of
+17V > Vcc and -17V > VDD.
The output pulse is obtained from
and Off levels. TOFF = VR2 x C pin 5 or pin 7 of IC1. The characteris-
IC LM393 has two comparators. We VON = Vcc x R5/(R5 + VR3) tics of the waveform obtained are
can use any comparator IC. The first VOFF = VDD x R5/(R5 + VR4) shown in the figure besides the circuit
comparator is used as an astable The circuit was tested with VON = diagram. The values of the variable
multivibrator and the other as a zero +15V and VOFF =-15V, up to 300kHz. resistors and the capacitor can be cal-
crossing detector. We can calculate The circuit can be energised by a single culated from the equations, given in
the text.

TOP-SECRET CODE LOCK
K.A. SAKTHIDHARAN
M ost electronic code locks are

provided with a number of push
switches. These are pushed one by one
ICs through transistor T2. IC1 is reset
at this time.
The second push switch S2 is
IC2 gets positive voltage and its output
pin 3 goes high. This condition is indi-
cated by the glow of LED2. The power
in a particular sequence to activate the pressed to give positive pulses to the transistor 2N3055 conducts and the
lock. However, if somebody else is input of IC1 , which is a decade motor starts rotating. This is a DC mo-
present while we are operating such a counter. Each time switch S2 is pushed, tor, rotating both in clockwise and anti-
lock, that person can easily manage to the output of IC1 increments one step. clockwise directions, depending upon
grasp the code by noting the finger On the sixth step, pin 5 (Q6) goes high the position of switch S3.
movements. and charges C2, providing bias for In the beginning, set the slide switch
The code lock described here elimi- transistor T3. Transistor T3 brings S3 in open or close mode. Then push
nates this drawback. It has only two down the trigger pin 2 of IC2 to nega- S1 once. LED1 glows . Push switch S2
push switches for entering the code tive level. But its output does not go six times. Then push switch Sl once
number. The mode of operation depends high because reset pin 4 remains at a and then switch S2 again four times.
upon the number of times the switch is low level. If switch S2 is pushed again, LED2 glows. Now, the lock is closed
pushed. Since the finger movements transistor T4 shorts the base of tran- or opened.
are minimised, it is impossible for an- sistor T3 to ground and pin 2 of IC2 The code numbers 6 and 4 are with
other person to copy the mode of op- will be brought to positive again. This respect to the diagram given. These
eration. Besides, the electronic part of should not happen for a successful op- may be altered by reconnecting the out-
this lock switches off automatically af- eration. puts of IC1 with diodes D2, D3 and
ter each operation. After the sixth push of switch S2, pin 4 of IC2. The door lock can be
When reset switch S1 is pushed, IC1 is reset by pushing S1 again. Four opened or closed with the help of the
capacitor C1 gets charged and gives successive pulses are given to the in- motor, which moves the latch inside
enough bias to operate transistor Tl. put of IC1 to hold the Q4 output (pin forward or backward with the help of
The positive supply is connected to the 10) high. In this position, reset pin 4 of a toothed wheel.

Readers Comments: The author, Mr K.A. Sakthidharan, re- lever (see fig) in such a way that each
Please convey my thanks to the author plies: time the lever is moved to and fro,
of the above circuit, published in EFY 1. To clarify the doubt, I am illus- either L1 or L2 gets closed.
March94. trating it with the help of a simple dia- 2. The DC motor can be replaced
1. I could not understand the use of gram, as shown in the figure. Leaf by a relay switch to drive any type of
the two leaf switches L1 and L2, con- locking system. In this
nected in parallel. case, 2N3055 may be re-
2. May I connect a relay at the out- placed by SL100.
put in place of the motor? Can I use tran- The positive pulse
sistor BC 148 in lieu of transistor available at the output of
2N3055, when I am using the relay only? IC2 may be used for trig-
Simon Philip gering other electronic
Thiruvalla gadgets. In this case, a
I want to clarify the following points motor is not necessary.
from the author regarding the above If the mechanical
circuit. parts of the lock are
1. Can the circuit be used without a smooth running and light
motor? weight, an ordinary mo-
2. Does the circuit need an ordi- tor serves the purpose.
nary motor as used in tape-recorders or Otherwise, a powerful
a special one? switches L1 and L2 are intended for motor should be connected through a
Ritesh Kumar stopping the circuit. These are to be relay switch.
Ratlam connected on both sides of the lock
ACCURATE FREQUENCY-TO-VOLTAGE
CONVERTER
C. SELVAM
H ere is a circuit of an accurate

frequency-to-voltage converter
using analogue phase detectors and
The reference clock, phase detector
and frequency comparator can be im-
plemented by using a single CMOS
two phase detectors and one linear volt-
age-controlled oscillator. The phase
comparator I is a digital type, employ-
multiplexers. PLL IC CD4046. This IC consists of ing an X-OR gate and the phase com-
The analogue-type phase detector
compares the two signal input frequen-
cies fin and f0, and provides an output
signal, which comprises the sum and
difference of the two signal frequen-
cies fin f0.
The frequency comparator gives
low output (0V) when fin < f0 and
high output (+Vcc) when fin > f0, and
this controls the 2-to-l analogue multi-
plexer. The multiplexer selects the com-
ponent fin f0 when its control is low
and selects Vcc/2 when it is high.
Initially, let fin < f0. The compo-
nent fin f0 is given to the low-pass
filter, to filter out the component fin +
f0, and its output DC voltage is propor-
tional to the input frequency fin for
constant f0. When fin becomes >f0,
the output goes to saturation, i.e. to
Vcc/2.

parator II is of the analogue type. This IC has three, 2-to-l multiplexers. While testing, f0 was first set to
The analogue phase comparator II Out of three, one can be used here. For 1kHz by adjusting the value of re-
compares the frequencies of the two the low-pass filter, a simple RC filter sistor VR1. Then the input frequency
input signals and it has two outputs. can be used. The complete implemen- was varied from 100 Hz to 1 kHz,
One output (at pin 1) provides an aver- tation is shown in the circuit diagram. and the corresponding DC output
age voltage, proportional to the com- The graphical characteristics of voltage measured. The output DC
ponent fin f0 and another (at pin 13) phase comparator at pin 1 of IC1 are voltage can be attenuated to a re-
provides low when fin < f0 and high shown alongside. From this, it is obvi- quired level and can be given to a
when fin > f0. The linear voltage-con- ous that when fin=f0, the average out- PMMC meter for analogue indication
trolled oscillator in IC 4046 can be put voltage is maximum, i.e. Vcc/2. or to a DVM for digital indication,
used as reference clock for constant f0 This is given by: corresponding to the unknown input
by giving constant input voltage to it. fin x Vcc frequency fin. Hence, this circuit can
The 2-to-l multiplexer can be imple- Vo = where fin < f0 be used for frequency measurement
mented by another CMOS IC CD4053. 2f0 also.
ROLLING ELECTRONIC DICE

SANJAY MALJURE
M ost popular indoor games

require a dice. The circuit for
electronic rolling display given here
wired as a six-state counter, the counter
sequence being 0-1-2-3-4-9-0.
Each state of the counter is used to
the LEDs 2 and 5, QD bits directly cor-
respond to the states of the LEDs 3 and
4. The QB and QC bits are NORed to
simulates an actual dice very closely. obtain one of the possible states, i.e. obtain the states of the LEDs 1 and 6.
Seven LEDs are used in the display. outcomes of the dice. It can be seen IC555 is used in the astable mode to
These LEDs are driven by a decoder cir- from the table that the QA bits inverted provide the clock to the counter. The
cuit of 3 NOR gates, which in turn are correspond to the states of LED7, QC frequency in this case is 22 Hz. The dis-
driven by the decade counter (IC7490) bits inverted correspond to the states of charge pin 7 of the IC 555 is connected

to an RC combination through a switch
as shown. The 330F capacitor charges State of IC7890 Condition of LEDs Count of
up to the supply voltage through the QD QC QB QA LED7 LEDs3,4 LEDs1,6 LEDs2,5 Dice
100-ohm resistor, and when the switch 1 0 0 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 1
is released this capacitor discharges 0 0 0 0 OFF ON OFF OFF 2
through the 10-megohm resistor. 0 0 0 1 ON ON OFF OFF 3
This mode of connection gives a 0 0 1 0 OFF ON ON OFF 4
signal of decaying frequency. This ef- 0 0 1 1 ON ON ON OFF 5
fect is seen on the display as a continu- 0 1 0 0 OFF ON ON ON 6
ously slow change of count of the dice
till it settles down to some steady state. cuit becomes foolproof even at low fre- output of IC 555 are given below for
Since the count of the dice continues to quencies and the use of this model at better comprehension. Switch S2 is
change even after the switch is released play becomes exciting. pushed on at t =Tl and released at, say
by the person who tries a roll, the cir- The plots of capacitor voltage and t =T2.
GRADUALLY TURNING-OFF
COURTESY LIGHT
M. S. NAGARAJ
T his simple circuit enables the

construction of an inexpensive and
compact courtesy light controller. Un-
MOSFET and the lamp on simultane-
ously.
When switch Sl is opened, C2 is
frequency at the op-amp output de-
creases from 100 per cent to zero per-
cent, causing gradual dimming of the
like the other controllers, this one does allowed to discharge through resistor intensity of the light to zero. When VI
not switch off the light abruptly, put- R5. Full-intensity light is produced till exceeds the ripple peak value, the lamp
ting the user in instant darkness. In- VI is less than VDC, the DC component becomes fully off.
stead, it provides the user full intensity of VNI. During the period, VI is com- Potentiometer VR1 provides an ad-
light for a fixed time, which then gradu- pared with the ripple component of VNI. justment for off delay from about 40
ally dims and finally goes off. The cir- The duty cycle of the pulses at line seconds to 20 minutes.
cuit dispenses with the bulky electro-
mechanical relay and the stepdown
transformer by using power MOSFET
as the control element. The circuit is
configured such that the normally dis-
charged timing capacitor ensures that
the circuit does not start timing se-
quence when the mains supply fails
and then resumes.
The line voltage is rectified by di-
odes Dl to D4. Op-amp LF351 is ener-
gised by the supply Vcc, developed by
resistor R1, diode D5, capacitor C1 and
zener D6. Voltage V NI, at the
noninverting input of the op-amp, has a
DC component derived from voltage
Vcc, scaled down by resistors R4, VR1
and R3, and a ripple component derived
from bridge rectifier output, scaled
down by resistors R2, VR1 and R3.
When switch Sl is closed, the volt-
age VI, at the inverting input-pin 2 of
IC1, is made zero and the capacitor C2
is charged to Vcc volts. Op-amp output
switches to Vcc volts, switching the

DIGITAL ON-OFF TIMER
BIJUKUMAR J.
T he circuit described here is of a

digital on-off timer. This timer is
capable of dual-mode operation. It also
ranging from both the On and Off pe-
riod control of the relay.
The circuit consists of eight ICs, a
in this circuit gives on-off timing prop-
erty, which avoids the need of
mechanical switches. Programmable
provides a wide range of timings (up set of four thumbwheel switches and lamp flasher is another feature of
to 9999 states) in seconds or minutes, six logic indicators. Automatic loading this circuit. In PLF working, the relay

turns on and off alternately, with IC 7493 is also a subcounter which clock input of the subcounter IC 7493
equal periods as in the case of an astable is used in the timer unit to drive to count a single pulse after the first
multivibrator. A four-stage display is the relay transistor. The QA output is programed time in the counter. In this
replaced by five logic indicators, which used for this purpose. The QB output is way, the first programed time in all
is another advantage of this circuit. used to operate the presettable counters. the counter outputs becomes 0000 and
The four 74190 presettable decade This output is connected to enable a low pulse acts at output of NAND
up-down counter ICs are the heart of input of all presettable counters. Hence, gate. The subcounter counts up a single
the circuit. IC 74190 is more suitable whenever a high appears in the QB out- pulse, and hence its output becomes
for developing timer circuits. It has four put, the counters stop counting opera- 0001. The relay is turned on at this
data input pins labelled A, B, C and D tions and remain in disable state. This time.
and four output data pins labelled QA, sub-counter is cleared by applying a The output of NAND gate and inte-
QB, QC and QD. Its pin 11 is used to set single high pulse while power is on. grator output are ANDed using a two-
the input data into the output. When a A low pulse of time duration above input AND gate and the resulting out-
low pulse is applied to this pin, the 1 ms is generated when the power put connected to load inputs of all
data at the input pins is transferred to is on. The electrolytic capacitor C1 counters. Due to this arrangement, af-
the output pins, i.e. QD, QC, QB, and charges through the resistor R10. ter the operation for first programed
QA become D, C, B, and A. This opera- After maximum charging, the output is time completes, an automatic loading
tion has a priority over others and is held in high state, but initially is done, and hence the second time or
done independently in all the cases. no charge condition produces a low Off time is automatically loaded into
This has an ENABLE pin 4. To operate pulse. To get the desired result, a resis- the counters.
the counter, this pin is connected at tor of one-kilohm and 10F capacitor After automatic loading of Off time,
low level. is used. the clock runs and the output becomes
When the pin goes to a high level, Thumbwheel switches are used to countdown with the clock. In this
the IC stops counting and disables all give the desired time to the counters. way, after the second programed time,
the operations except load operation. The thumbwheel switches have one in- another low pulse appears at the NAND
To set the counters in the count- put terminal and four output BCD lines. gate output. This results in next
down mode, keep the up/down input The actual method to select the desired loading and single pulse counting by
pin high or open. This pin is labelled BCD code using thumbwheel switches the sub-counter. Hence, its output
Down/Up and is pin 5. The clock is is to connect the input terminal to the becomes 0010. At this time, the relay
applied to pin 14. QD is taken as the output when high output is required. turns off due to low level in QA and
clock output. To get this result, connect VCC supply a high pulse in the QB results in a hold
This also has two outputs, which to input terminal and connect 16 resis- state of the system operation. Then
indicate the conditions of outputs QD, tors from each output of four thumb- all presettable counters stop counting,
QC, QB, and QA. When the counter wheel switches to the ground. The out- and hence all counter and subcounter
output reaches 0000 in the count- put data is taken from the BCD out- ICs output states remain in the above
down mode and also 1001 in the puts. state. Due to this reason, after the
countup mode, the maximum/minimum In the connection arrangement de- On time, the relay works and then after
pin 12 goes to the high level. Hence, in scribed above, whenever we need a high the Off time, the relay turns off. Hence,
this system, the data output is used to data, the connection occurs, and hence the system automatically remains in the
identify the maximum and minimum the voltage across the resistor is +5V. disabled state.
count states of the counter outputs. But for a low pulse, no connection oc- The clock generator unit is used
When the output of any counter reaches curs, and hence there is no source cur- to give one-second and one-minute
0000, its pin 12 goes to a high level. rent. So, the above arrangement gives pulses for the operation of the timer. It
IC 7408 contains four two-input ground through the resistor. is wired around a CMOS IC
AND gates. Three gates are connected After arranging the desired On time CD 4060, due to its advantages over
to get a four-input AND gate. The fourth in thumbwheel switches, press the all other clock generators. It contains
gate is used for ANDing the load pulse, power-on switch. The power is given an oscillator section and a divide
which is given from power on the reset to the timer unit and the common cir- by 214 counter. The oscillator section
switch and output of four-input NAND cuits. The load pulse applied to the produces high frequency clock and
gate. counters is done in two ways. Due to then the counter section divides it to
IC 74LS00 contains four two-input low detecting operation, an AND gate suitable one-second and one-minute
NANDgates. Two gates of this IC are is used. Pin 12 of all counters is con- periods. The basic clock has a
used as inverters. One of these inverters nected to the four inputs of the four- time period of 2.2 RC seconds, and
is connected at the output of the four- input NAND gate. This gate is realised hence the final output has a much
input AND gate and results in a four- by using three two-input AND gates larger time period of 2.2 RC x 214 sec-
input NAND gate configuration. The and an inverter. onds. Due to the smaller values of
second inverter is used to invert a low Whenever the output of all the the capacitor and resistor used, the
pulse given by power-on reset switch counters becomes 0000, pin 12 of all stability of the clock period becomes
when power is on. This single high counters goes to a high level. Hence, constant.
pulse is used to clear the subcounter the output of NAND gate becomes low.
IC 7493. This output is always connected to the

RAIN-OPERATED WIPER
UNNIKRISHNAN
T he circuit shown in the figure is

designed to operate wipers fitted
in vehicles. These are special types of
wipers that turn on automatically when
it begins to rain and turn off when the
rain stops.
The circuit is based on the versa-
tile, multipurpose timer chip 555. The
timer 555 is used in the monostable
mode in the circuit. The timer is trig-
gered when a voltage below 1/3 Vcc is
applied at its trigger pin. The sensor is
connected between the trigger pin and
ground. One can make a suitable sensor accord- as possible, so as to have a more com-
The circuit can also be turned on or ing to ones choice. A model of the pact and reliable sensor. The sensor
off, using switch S1. As the sensor de- sensor is shown in the figure. The dis- shown here is made from resistor
tects rain, the wiper starts operating. tance between the rails is made as small leads or small metal foil pieces.
PROGRAMMABLE 100-DAY TIMER

BABU M.G.
T his is a timer circuit designed to

give five different outputs. The
output can be delayed up to 100 days
(CD4040), a four-input AND gate
(CD4082) and a decoder (CD4515).
The clock frequency of 555 is adjust-
driven by IC2 via IC5, which is a four-
input AND circuitry. The count of IC3
is 960 when all the outputs from IC3,
by varying the clock frequency. The able and can be varied by adjusting i.e. Qo to Q3 become high and the
circuit has an advantage that it pro- VR1 suitably. When the first 12-bit bi- overall count is 864000.
vides flexibility in the output range. If nary counter (IC2) gets a count of 900, When a clock frequency of 1Hz is
the five outputs are taken at a time the second binary counter (IC3) is given, the output time period of the
when the clock is adjusted
for 0.5 Hz, the outputs are
given by the time periods
of 10,20,30,40 and 50 days.
By adjusting VR1 now, if
the clock frequency is made
0.1 Hz, the output time pe-
riods change to 20, 40, 60,
80 and 100 days. If only
the fifth output is taken, the
timer will give an output
after 100 days.
The circuit makes
use of a 555 clock IC, two
12-bit binary counters

Frequency (Hz) Outputs (After days) fifth output will be ten days. With a
clock frequency of 10 Hz, the output
Output1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5
time period at output terminal 5 be-
0.5 10 20 30 40 50 comes one day. Thus, by changing the
0.1 20 40 60 80 100 value of VR1, the clock frequency
1 2 4 6 8 10 changes accordingly, which in turn in-
2 1 2 3 4 5 troduces a change in the output, as de-
10 1/5 2/5 3/5 4/5 1 picted in the table.
PHASE SEQUENCE DETECTOR

CUM SINGLE-PHASE PROTECTOR
HARINDER SINGH
F or three-phase motors, it is
essential that all the three phases
are present in a particular sequence.
sent, or if the phases are not in a cor-
rect sequence.
The problem with most electronic
operation, but in actual practice the sup-
ply frequency is anywhere between 47
Hz and 53Hz. This circuit is able to
This circuit cuts off the supply to the equipment is that the supply frequency accommodate such changes in the sup-
equipment if any of the phases is ab- should be precisely 50 Hz for correct ply frequency.

Rectified voltage from each phase Thus, the output of FF1 goes high equipment is disconnected. The time
is stepped down, using voltage divid- (as the J input of FF1 is already high at period is given by:
ers formed around resistors Rl to R6. the time of the clock pulse leading edge T=1.1 Ct+Rt
This stepped-down voltage is used to arriving at the triggering terminal). T is set to approximately 25ms, i.e.
drive transistors T1-T3 from phases Now, when the blue-phase(B) voltage the circuit will operate flawlessly at
B,Y and R, respectively. Schmitt-trig- VB goes above 146V, the output of frequencies as low as 42 Hz. Diode D4
gered NAND gates N1-N3 shape up gate Nl goes high, while the output of protects T5 from the back emf, gener-
the signals from transistors T1-T3, re- gate N2 is already high, resulting in ated due to the switching of relay RL1.
spectively. IC2 is a positive edge-trig- the output of FF2 going high. If any of the phase supply fails, the
gered, clocked, dual-JK flip-flop. The The above process repeats itself phase sequence is disturbed, resulting
sequence is detected, using IC2 and once in each cycle. When the Q out- in de-energising of the relay, and thus
N4. puts of both flip-flops FF1 and FF2 are switching off of the machine.
When the red-phase(R) voltage VR high, i.e. the phase sequence is correct, The circuit is so small that it can
rises just above 146V, the output of the output of gate N4 goes low, result- be fitted even within an existing
NAND gate N3 goes from low to high, ing in the triggering of IC3, and hence switching unit. The circuit costs
resulting in clearing of both FF1 and energising the relay which controls the around Rs150.
FF2 through capacitor Cl. supply to the machine. Note: As some of the parts in the cir-
While VR is still above 146V, the IC3 is wired as a retriggerable cuit contain fatal voltages, special care
yellow-phase(Y) voltage VY rises monoshot timer, whose time period is should be taken during testing and in-
above 146V, resulting in the output of set by resistor Rt and capacitor Ct. If stallation. The circuit should be properly
gate N2 going high, and hence provid- the monoshot is not retriggered within isolated from all metallic parts of the
ing a clock pulse to FF1. this period, the relay is put off, i.e. the machine and its switching units/casing.
MULTICHANNEL TOUCH SWITCH

PRADEEP G.
T his is a circuit of a
touch switch which op-
erates by simply touching
seven channels.
One of the interesting
applications of this circuit
the touch-plates. The relays is a touch-sensitive tape-re-
are operated sequentially on corder. The tape recorders
touching TP1 to TP7. Play, Fast, Rewind, Stop and
The heart of this circuit Eject switches may be me-
is a seven-channel Darlin- chanically or electronically
gton array IC ULN2004. connected to the relay con-
Seven touchplates are pro- tacts. So, different relays can
vided, one each at the input be operated by touching the
of each Darlington stage. And corresponding touchplates.
seven relays are connected at Reverse-biased diodes
the outputs. connected across the relays
When we bridge any inside IC1 protect the IC
touchplate with the main from back emf, generated
plate be a finger (connected during the relay coil breaks.
to the positive supply), the Electrolytic capacitors
corresponding Darlington connected across the relays
transistor saturates and the help to prevent relay
corresponding relay gets chatterings.
energised. That is, when TP1 The IC ULN2004 costs
is bridged to the main plate around Rs15.
by a finger, relay RL1 is Note: The spacing be-
energised. On bridging TP2 tween the touchplates to the
with the main plate, relay main plate should be as
RL2 is energised. This pro- short as possible (2mm in
cess continues all through the prototype).
TWO-IN-ONE SWITCH CIRCUIT
TARUN IQBAL SINGH
H ere is a circuit which provides

two types of switches, i.e. touch-
switch and staircase switch. Most
IC1 has been wired up in mono-
stable mode, with the time period given
by 1.1RC. Each touch causes it to per-
the output on pin 15 is high, it be-
comes low on touching the touchplate
or by pressing S2,S3 ... Sn and vice
touch-switch circuits published in ear- form one monostable operation. A simi- versa. This makes the relay activate
lier issues of Electronics For You have lar action takes place when any of the and deactivate, thus switching on and
the disadvantage of having two sepa- push-to-on type switches, i.e. S2, S3... off the device connected to the relay
rate touchplates for the On/Off opera- Sn is pressed. contacts. S1 is an SPDT switch, which
tion. The circuit presented here uses a The output of IC1 from pin 3 is used here as a selector switch.
single touchplate. On touching the is connected to the clock input (pin Please, note that CD4027 has two
plate, the gadget connected through 13) of JK master slave flip-flop independent JK flip-flops, and only one
the relay will switch on and on next CD4027. Its truth table is also given. of these two has been used here. If by
touch, the relay will switch it off. Out of the four conditions, the last chance one of these gets damaged, the
Therefore, a single touchplate per- one is used in this circuit. J and K, other one can be used by simply study-
forms both the functions. An electri- i.e. pins 10 and 11 of IC2 are made ing the pin configuration of CD4027
cal device can be controlled from a high. Now, for every positive-going and then suitably changing the pin con-
number of switch locations with the clock edge obtained from IC1 (pin 3), nections.
help of switches S2, S3 ... Sn. the output of CD4027 toggles. So, if
Readers Comments: lar? tween pin 3 of IC1 and ground. By

The circuit of Two-in-one Switch Sandeep Mathur touching the touch plate or pushing
is very interesting. I have assembled Delhi the push-button switch, the meter
it on the PCB designed by my- should read about 8V or so for three
self. But when I switched on the The author, Tarun Iqbal Singh, replies: to ten seconds. If this happens, the IC
supply the relay got energised I am thankful to Mr Mathur for tak- is good.
without my touching the touching interest in my circuit. Now, connect again the voltmeter
plate or pressing the switches. The Transistor CL100 is a suitable re- between pin 15 and ground. On touch-
PCB designed is matching the circuit. placement of SL100. The PCB design ing the plate or push-button switch, the
Please suggest remedies for pro- sent to me is correct in all respects. meter should now read about 9 volts
per operation of the circuit and the PCB. Please, try to increase the value of R4 until we touch the plate or press the
Also, I used transistor CL100 instead to 2.2M or even higher, if necessary. push-button switch again.
of SL100. Are these transistors simi- Connect a voltmeter (0-10V) be-

STEREO AUDIO LEVEL INDICATOR
UNNIKRISHNAN P.R.
A udio level indicators are used

with most audio systems and can
be easily incorporated into any deck.
The two switches go On/Off according
to the output levels of the 4017 IC.
IC 555 works as an astable multivi-
tor T3. Transistors T2 and T3 are also
controlled by the outputs of IC 4017.
When the first output of IC 4017 (pin
There are many audio level circuits pub- brator to generate a rectangular wave 3) is high, the first switch in IC 4066 is
lished in earlier issues of Electronics at a frequency of about 55 Hz. It is fed enabled. Since transistors T2 and T3 are
For You. The circuit presented here de- to the input of IC 4017, CMOS decade both pnp type, therefore transistors T3
scribes a stereo version of audio indi- counter. This IC is working in the toggle is cut off when transistor T2 goes into
cators. The first ten LEDs are used to mode, because the Q2 output (pin 4) is saturation. The anodes of the first set of
indicate the right channel and the sec- connected to the reset pin. LEDs get the positive supply, so LEDs
ond row of LEDs indicates the left The output from the CMOS switch 1 to 10 glow according to the right in-
channel. is amplified by a single-stage amplifier, put, since the first switch in IC 4066 is
The circuit uses a bar graph display built around transistor Tl. It is then fed connected to the right channel.
driver ICs LM3914N, 555, 4017 and to the input of IC4 (3914). The outputs When the output of IC2 (pin 2) is
4066. The input signal is given to two of IC 3914 are connected to 20 LEDs. high, the second switch in 4066 is en-
presets to set the voltage at a correct The anodes of the first ten LEDs are abled. So, the left input is given to the
level. This is then fed to the CMOS connected to the collector of transistor input of IC 3914. Transistor T2 is cut
switches inside IC 4066. Only two of T2. The anodes of the other ten LEDs off and transistor T3 goes into satura-
the four switches are used in the circuit. are connected to the collector of transis- tion. Thus, the second set of LEDs

glows according to the voltage level. that of the two presets VR1 andVR2. able level to display the LEDs in each
The only adjustment required is Both the presets are adjusted to a suit- channel.
Readers Comments: LM3914 for each channel will also save are ill-founded.
Regarding the circuit Stereo Audio space on the PCB. Moreover, the technique of multi-
Level Indicator by Mr Unnikrishnan Pawan Kumar Khatri plexing enables the circuit to handle
P.R., the author has multiplexed Jodhpur up to ten channels, which means it can
both the channels on the same bar-graph give ten different outputs. The circuit
display IC LM3914. The approach is The author, Mr Uhnikrishnan P.R., re- can thus be used to indicate:
excellent, but the circuit is not eco- plies: 1. 4- or 8-track stereo signal levels.
nomical. The cost of other ICs (555, ICs 4017, 4066 and 555 cost around 2. Play back and recording levels
4017, 4066) and transistors (BC188 etc) rupees twelve each and transistor in double cassette deck at the same
exceeds the cost of IC LM3914. BC188 costs rupees three. So, the total time, which is very useful for synchro-
It would be better to use another cost for stereo indication does not ex- nous dubbing.
LM3914 IC for the second channel to ceed rupees forty two. On the other 3. Different channel inputs in a pub-
avoid wiring over the other ICs and hand, a single IC 3914 costs about ru- lic address system simultaneously.
transistors. Using a separate IC pees fifty five. So, the readers fears
KEYBOARD WITH STROBE SIGNAL

PRATAP HALKARNIKAR
T he circuit shows a keyboard which

can generate a key-code along with
handshaking signals. The circuit uses
ing the strobe signal STB, it can load
the key-code into the input port of the
microcomputer system.
of IC 7430 goes high, whenever any
key is pressed. This triggers one of
the monostable sections(A) of IC
hardware detection of depressed key In this circuit, eight keys of the 74123, which activates IC 74374
and generation of its code. By generat- pushbutton type are used. The output latch by enabling it (LE). This latches

key-code into IC 74374. At the same input port. the R-C value of the second mono-
time, it triggers the next monostable This circuit is useful where hand- stable. Active high (STB) or active
section(B) of IC 74123 which gives shaking signals are necessary for key- low (STB) signal is generated by se-
the STB signal. This signal loads the board interface. Handshaking signals lecting the Q or Q output of the
valid data latched into IC 74374 into can be made compatible by adjusting monostable.
HYBRID AUDIO OUTPUT AMPLIFIER

A.S.V. RAVI SHANKAR
P resented here is a hybrid type

high-fidelity audio output am-
plifier. The design allows it to deliver
cursion at the output of the opamp is
about l2V at full-drive condition. This
voltage drives the current amplifica-
Transistors T2 and T4 are to be mounted
on heat sinks. The circuit needs a sym-
metrical power supply capable of pro-
8W into an 8-ohm load, and 16W into tion section, based on a complemen- viding 1.5A, with an 8-ohm output load
a 4-ohm load. IC1(a) is a preamplifier tary Darlington emitter-follower con- and 3A with 4-ohm output load. The
with input impedance of about 100 figuration. The coupling between the circuit has been tested at an 8-ohm out-
kilohms. This is followed by the vol- voltage and current amplification sec- put load. The cost of the circuit is about
ume control VR1. The signal is then tions is formed by just four resistors. Rs 60.
fed to the voltage amplification stage, The final output is taken out through a Note: The circuit was tested at EFY
based on IC1(b). The high slew rate of zoebel network for stability. The out- Lab with two 741 opamps, instead of
the opamp (9V/s) is ideally suited to put voltage at full drive is around 8V. NE5532, and was found to be working
this application, since the voltage ex- The output current must not exceed 2A. well.
SAWTOOTH WAVE GENERATOR

C. SELVAM
A sawtooth wave is generated by

charging a capacitor at a specified
rate and then rapidly discharging it
utilises this principle.
The switch is realised, using the
4053 analogue multiplexer. IC1 is a V-
pacitor C to charge at a rate set by I =
Vi/R. For proper operation, this cur-
rent must always flow out of IC1s
with a switch. Here is a circuit which I converter (integrator) that forces ca- summing junction; hence, Vi must

TABLE
C Practical Calculated
in F frequencyin Hz frequency in Hz
0.1 1710 1706
0.2 1047 0853
0.3 0824 0569
0.4 0708 0427
0.5 0635 0341
0.6 0584 0284
0.7 0546 0243
0.8 0515 0213
0.9 0491 0190
1.0 0471 0170
Note: -Vi = 476.5mV; R = 558.4 (1%); and
VT= 5V; C is Laboratory Standard
Capacitor
proportional to product R1 x C1, is de-

signed to ensure complete discharge of
capacitor C by the switch. With the com-
ponents shown, TD is less than 20s.
After timing out, the comparator output
returns to low state and the switch be-
comes Off again, allowing capacitor C
to resume charging. The cycle, there-
fore, repeats itself. The waveforms gen-
erated are shown below the circuit.
From the waveforms shown here
and from the equation (1), at time t =
T, Vs = VT
Vi
f = ...2.
always be negative. Resistor R2 and When the output of the integrator VT RC
R3 establish a threshold voltage exceeds the threshold voltage VT, the The above circuit was tested in our
VT = Vcc x R3 comparator output becomes high and laboratory (Measurements & Instru-
(R2+R3) the switch shorts the capacitor C, and ments Lab, IIT, Madras) and the obser-
During capacitor charge, the com- hence Vs falls down to 0V. vations during the testing of this cir-
parator output is in Low state and the The comparator is prevented from cuit are as under:
switch is in Off state. The output of the responding immediately to this change Voltage : HIL 2665 DMM
integrator will be because of the charge accumulated in measured (0.5% accuracy)
1 t Vi capacitor Cl during the comparators Waveforms : KIKUSI COM 7101A
~
Vs = Vidt = t ...1. output transition from 0V to +7.5V. This and frequency 100 MHz digital
RC o RC one-shot action, whose duration TD is measured oscilloscope.
MULTICHANNEL WATER
LEVEL MONITOR-CUM-CONTROLLER
AJITESH ARUN AND ANIMESH ARUN
T he circuit differs from standard

water level monitors in that it is
more user-friendly, economical and
dio indication of a full tank, auto-off
for the pump and an inverter logic gate
to prevent dry running of the motor.
prises the UM66 musical IC and the
logic gate turns off the pump when
water is not available for pumping to
easier to construct. Its main features The circuit is configured around the upper tank.
aremains operation, a 64-note ROM- three parallel BEL188 pnp transistor Assembling can be easily done on
based music generator to provide au- amplifiers. The note generator com- a 5 cm x 5 cm veroboard. The circuit,

speaker and transformer can be housed
in a plastic remote-bell cabinet.
A normally-closed solidstate relay
can be used in place of the musical
circuit to turn off the pump automati-
cally.
Probe 1 goes to the top of the upper
tank, to indicate full water level.
Probe 2 goes to the middle of the
upper tank to indicate normal water
level.
Probe 3 is kept at the bottom of the
lower tank. A chime and turning off of
pump automatically, accompanied by
bicolour LED showing yellow, means
upper tank is full.
Readers Comments:
I am a new reader of EFY and have
found the circuit Multichannel Water
Level Monitor-cum-Controller by
Messrs Ajitesh and Animesh Arun very
useful. I used two types of UM 66 ICs,
with annotation UM66 (TOIL) 8719
and UM 66 (TI9S) 911. The first IC
works very well, but the second one
generates music only once. It does not
repeat the music, unless the power sup-
ply is disconnected first and then re-
connected across pins 2 and 3. Is it
possible to generate a continuous tone
form UM66 (TI9S) 911?
Bimlendu Shekhar
Bihar
The authors, Messrs Ajitesh and

Animesh Arun, reply:
TABLE We thank Mr Shekhar for the inter-
LED Display Inference Directors est shown in our project. In the proto-
Yellow Water levels normal in Pump may be turned on, if type we have made, we used UM66 IC
both tanks. more water is to be pumped up. available in TO-92 package. Appar-
Green Upper tank short of Turn-on pump. ently, the first type of UM66 IC used
water; lower tank normal. by you gives a continuous output,
Red Lower tank has no water; Turn-off pump. whereas the second one needs to be
upper tank normal. triggered each time to give a series of
notes. The relay works in both the cases.
PROGRAMMABLE 100-HOUR TIMER

UNNIKRISHNAN P.R
T his is a simple timer, designed

with readily available ICs. It can
be programmed up to 100 hours. When
cuts off the load automatically, resets
the counters and gets ready for the next
operation. The circuit uses a single 4060
decade counters, one 4011 quad NAND
gate and one 7555 CMOS timer IC.
IC 4060 produces a pulse every
it reaches the preset time, the timer oscillator cum binary divider, two 4017 hour. This is fed to the input of first

4017 (IC2). The carry output from IC2 (discharge) of IC4 is open. So, if IC4 is its output goes to a low state. This re-
is given to the input of the next 4017 triggered, its output stays in the on state sets IC4 and the output of IC4 goes
(IC3). as long as it is not reset. low. This de-energises the relay. At the
Both the ICs are connected to ro- Switch S5 is used to trigger IC4 and same time, the input of NAND gate
tary type 10-way switch. The time pe- switch S4 is used to reset IC4. The condi- IC5(b) goes low, so that its output is
riod is preset, using these switches S2 tion of the load is detected by watching high. This high output resets ICs 1, 2
and S3. S2, is meant for hour position LED21. The output of IC4 is fed to the base and 3 and helps them to stay in the
and S3 for ten-hour position. That is, if of transistor Tl. The relay is connected at reset state.
switch S2 is in the third position (cl), it the collector of transistor Tl. When switch S5 is pressed to start
stands for third hour, and if switch S3 For each pulse from IC 4060, the the timer, the timers output goes high,
is in fourth position (d2), it stands for 4 output of IC2 is changed in a sequen- so that the output of second NAND
x 10 hours. You can get the time by tial mode. After 10 pulses, IC2 gives gate IC5(b) goes low. This enables the
adding the two, i.e. 40 + 3=43 hours. It a pulse to IC3. Thus, for each set of three ICs to count. The twenty LEDs
means, the load is disconnected when 10 pulses from IC1, output of IC3 help to detect the counting of the two
43rd hour is reached. changes sequentially. 4017 ICs. The only adjustment needed
The common points of switches S2 When the (high) outputs of IC2 is to set the value of preset VR1. It is
and S3 are connected to the two inputs and IC3 reach the preset value set by adjusted to get exact one-hour pulse
of NAND gate IC5(a), whose output is switches S2 and S3, both the inputs from the third pin of IC1.
given to the reset pin 4 of IC4. Pin 7 of NAND gate IC5(a) go high, so that
Readers Comments: for 1 to 10 hours. By inserting an SPDT the letter is not necessary because
In Programmable 100-hour Timer it is switch, as shown, one may fulfil this the timer itself can work from 00
not possible to set switches S2 and S3 requirement. to 99.
The position of the switch can be The confusion has arisen per-
changed as per ones requirement. haps from the example cited in the de-
V. Shailaja Kumari scription, wherein to get 43 hours the
Bangalore common pins of switches S2
and S3 are to be in contact with the
The author, Mr Unnikrishnan P.R., third and fourth outputs of respective
replies: ICs.
The modification suggested in

-30V TO +30V REGULATED
POWER SUPPLY
SUNIL KUMAR
D ual power supply circuit pre-

sented here provides 1A regulated
supply from -30V to +30V.
VR6 are used to limit the value of cur-
rent.
This circuit has a short-circuit
and a positive current will neutralise it,
and no current will reach the
base of transistors Tl and T2. Hence,
The variable resistors VR1 to protection. If we connect together the transistors Tl and T2 remain cut-off.
VR6, used in the circuit, are dual output terminals of the power supply, Since emitter terminals of T1 and T2
type pots. The power supplys out- its output voltage will be zero, though are connected to the bases of transis-
put voltage can be increased or de- some voltage drop occurs across resistors T3 and T4, these will be cut-off
creased by VR3 and VR4, and more tors R5 and R6. Transistors T5 and too and the supply would be cut-off.
smoothly and accurately by VR1 and T6 conduct and a negative current Thus, short-circuit protection is en-
VR2. The variable resistors VR5 and will flow towards the cathode of zeners sured.

SCR/TRIAC TESTER CUM
DISTINGUISHER
B. S. MALIK
T he size and shape of an SCR

and a triac being similar, it is
sometimes difficult to distinguish be-
and G-2 will display G. Displays B,
G-1 and G-2 are of common-anode
type, whereas display t is of com-
and switch S2 is pressed, then none of
the seven segments operate. When
switch S1 is at position 1 and S2 is
tween the two, particularly when the mon-cathode type. Switch Sl is used to pressed then B and G-1 displays oper-
device number is not visible. When the distinguish the SCR/triac under test. ate; B display indicates that the device
device is marked properly, it is of course Resistor R2 limits gate triggering cur- under test may be an SCR/triac. Both
easy to consult a data book to distin- rent to SCR/triac. IC socket is provided G-1 and G-2 displays indicate the de-
guish it. To distinguish an unmarked for fixing the device under test. Switch vice is good and t display indicates
device, a multimeter or some other sys- S2 is press type (Bell switch) and tests that the device is a triac.
tem can be used, but this is not a straight the device for its working order. When a triac has been inserted
and easy method. To solve this prob- As 230V AC is applied to trans- in the socket and switch Sl is at
lem, a simple and reliable system with- former X1, 6V AC gets applied to di- position 2 and S2 is pressed, then B
out any complicated operation is re- odes Dl and D2 for half-wave rectifi- and G-2 displays operate. When Sl
quired. Such a circuit is given here. cation. When switch Sl is at position 2 is at position 1 and S2 is pressed, t and
X1 is a 6V, 250mA sec. transformer. then negative DC voltage is applied to G-1 displays will operate. In this
Resistor Rl is a current limiter for the seven segment t, G-1, G-2 and anode/ way the device can be tested and
seven-segment displays. Diodes Dl and T2 terminal of SCR/triac, respectively. distinguished and an indication of
D2 are half-wave rectifiers. B, t, G-1 One end of transformer X1 goes to cath- whether the triac/ SCR is good or bad
and G-2 are the seven-segment displays ode/ Tl of IC socket directly. is given by the displays.
that display the letters B, t and G. G-1 If an SCR is fixed in the IC socket For B display (common anode

type) short pins a,b,c,d,e,f and g. For now. It confirms the device is an SCR out pressing switch S2.
t display (common cathode type) short and not a triac. (b) If displays operate without press-
pins d,e,f and g. For G-1 and G-2 dis- Now, insert a triac in the socket and ing S2, then the SCR/triac is internally
plays (common anode type) short pins put switch Sl to position 1. On pressing short.
a,c,d,e and f. S2, displays B and G-l light up to indi- (c) If the device is open internally,
Insert a good SCR in the IC socket cate that the device (SCR/triac) is good. then no display will operate in any con-
and switch on the mains supply. Put Turn switch Sl to position 2 and press dition of switches Sl and S2.
switch Sl to position 1. Press switch Sl. Display shows t and G-2, i.e. the (d) All the connections and fittings
S2. Displays B and G-1 should oper- device is a triac and is good. should be firm and proper.
ate, showing that the device may be an Without pressing S2, none of the The approximate cost of the circuit
SCR or a triac, but it is good. Now put displays should operate. is Rs 125.
switch Sl to position 2 and press Sl. Following points may be noted:
None of the displays should operate (a) No display should operate with-
Readers Comments: Similarly, a red LED could be used as far as economy is concerned. But
The circuit for SCR/Triac Tester Cum to indicate a good triac in position 2 whereas the LEDs will indicate the sta-
Distinguisher is very interesting, but of switch S1. If the LEDs light up with- tus through a set of combinations, the
has become expensive out pressing S2, then the triac/SCR is 7-segment display will show letters B,
due to use of the four 7-segment dis- internally short. And if none of the t and G to present a clear, confusion-
plays. LEDs light up in any position of S1 free display.
I propose use of four LEDs, instead and S2, then the device under test is Though my circuit is costlier, its
of the displays to make it economical. open internally. performance would prove much better
Green LED could be used to indicate Jayanta Kumar Chakraborty in the long run. Initially, I had also
good SCR/Triac in position 1 of Jamatra (Distt Dumka) developed the circuit with LEDs, but
switch S1. No indication of LEDs in later I decided to use the 7-segment
position 2 of S1 would indicate a good The author, Mr B.S. Malik, replies: display instead. I thank the reader for
SCR on test. The readers suggestion is correct pointing out this possibility
THERMOMETER ADD-ON
TO MULTIMETER
AMRIT BIR TIWANA
T he compact add-on described

here, when used in conjunction
with a multimeter (analogue), will en-
able it to measure temperatures in the
-50 to +150 centigrade range.
The whole thermometer is based
on the National Semiconductors op-
amp type LM10, which suitably ampli-
fies and regulates the low current pro-
duced across the sensor. The sensor, an
IC type LM134, produces a small cur-
rent of the order of a few microamps at
150 centigrade, and this varies lin-
early with the change in temperature.
Preset VR1 is used to correct linearity
of the incremented output.
The final output is fed via points A
and B to a multimeter or milliammeter,
switched to the 100A range. since its current demand is so low that tronic watches (1.2V, button type) will
The circuit needs no on/off switch, even the mercury cell used in elec- last fairly long.

LISTENING BUG
PRADEEP G.
U sing this circuit, one can listen to

the conversation going on in a
room from a remote place. The circuit
sions 6x4 cms. Volume control and the
speaker are fitted externally.
A shielded two-wire ribbon cable is
through the loudspeaker, if somebody
talks into the microphone. Log preset
VR1 is used to control the input, given
is highly sensitive. Sound signals are recommended to connect the micro- to the power amplifier.
picked up by a condenser
microphone and con-
verted into electrical sig-
nals which are then am-
plified to a suitable level.
The sound is reproduced
through a loudspeaker.
The circuit mainly
consists of two amplifiers.
One of these is a micro-
phone preamplifier and
the other is a mini power
amplifier. The preampli-
fier stage is of high-gain
type. It is a two-stage di-
rect-coupled complemen-
tary-stage, which has a
gain of about 100.
The R8/R5 ratio gives the gain of phone. The wire should be as short as Next, place the circuit in an adja-
the preamplifier stage. possible, otherwise AC hum will be cent room where a conversation is go-
At the power amplifier stage, IC generated. Shielded wire should be used ing on. Keep the loudspeaker in your
LM386 has been used. Different types for volume control also. A simple 9V own room. Two-core ordinary plastic
of LM386 ICs are available. These can unregulated but well filtered power sup- insulation cable can be used between
be operated at a supply voltage of 6V ply is recommended. loudspeaker and the amplifier. One can
to 12V. The difference between differ- Check all the connections thorou- hear the conversation very clearly. The
ent versions of LM386 lies in the maxi- ghly. If everything is correct, keep the circuit can pick up sounds from a dis-
mum output power delivered by them, loudspeaker a few metres away and tance of several metres. Do not place
at different maximum supply voltages. switch on the power supply. Turn on the amplifier and the loudspeaker in a
The circuit can be easily assembled the volume control slowly and adjust it single room or nearby to avoid howl-
on a general-purpose PCB of dimen- to mid position. Sound can be heard ing feedback.
TELEPHONE TAPPING/MISUSE
INDICATOR
H. RAJEN SINGH
W hen the phone is in idle

condition (on hook), the full
voltage of 48V DC from the exchange
is engaged by lifting the hand-set, the
voltage across the line falls down to
around 12V. Thus, under idle condition
tive biasing voltage to the base of tran-
sistor Tl. As transistor Tl conducts, tran-
sistor T2 gets into reverse bias and stops
appears across the line. When the phone (48V), VR1 is adjusted to give a posi- conduction. If the phone is off-hook,
Tl stops conducting due to voltage drop
across the lines and subsequently tran-
sistors T2 and T3 start oscillating and
beeping is heard.
The on/off switch S1 may be a push
to on switch. It can be fitted inside the
telephone instrument in conjunction
with the hook switch, so that unwanted
beeping can be avoided during use of
the phone and beeping can be heard
only when the phone is tapped, discon-
nected or faulty. Thus, this circuit can
be used as an indicator for telephone
tapping/misuse by an unauthorised per-
son.
Readers Comments: principle, the circuit can be modified phone line voltage for satisfactory op-
I have made a little modification in it in many ways for various purposes/ eration of our phone.
and found that it can work as a tele- indicators. 2. Yes, an LED can be placed
phone misuse indicator as well as a Regarding Mr Chatterjees ques- as suggested, but an audio indi-
telephone amplifier. Just a simple 2- tions:
way, 1-pole switch is to be connected, 1. The +Vcc
as shown, for the purpose. supply can also
Sasank Borua be taken from
Golaghat (Assam) the phone line it-
I would like to request the author of self through a
Telephone Indicator circuit to clarify: circuit to control
1. Whether the +Vcc supply can the required
be taken from phone line itself? lower voltage
2. Can an LED be placed with a level. However,
series resistor in place of R3, eliminat- this gadget not
ing the other components? only indicates the
B. Chatterjee tapping/misuse
Calcutta of the phone, but
The author, Mr H. Rajen Singh, re- also monitors the
plies: health of the
Mr Sasanks idea is nice. The most phone line. So,
important point that we have to keep in use of separate power supply is rec- cator is more efficient than a visual
mind is the basic working principle of ommended. Moreover, as far as pos- indicator.
the circuit. Once we know the working sible, we should not disturb the tele-
ELECTRONIC CALLING SYSTEM

PRAVIN KRISHNARAO RAUT
T his calling system is useful to

doctors, officers etc for use in
their cabins. The system comprises four
play boards are placed on the door of
the cabin and the alarm is placed on
the display board.
N/O point to the alarm unit. Similarly,
connect the N/C point of relay RL-A to
the triac and N/O point to the display
unitsthe relay driver unit, the flash- Relay driver unit comprises a step- board.
ing unit, the alarm unit and the display down transformer, rectifier diodes, a Flashing unit is configured around
unit. filter capacitor, a 6V DPDT relay and a the timer IC 555. VR1 is connected
Switch Sl in this circuit is to be switch. Connect the N/C point of relay between pins 6 and 7. The output pin 3
placed on the users table. The dis- RL-B to the flashing unit and of this IC is connected to triac BT162

through a diode D7 and a 220-ohm last unit. These boards are made up of door of the cabin. Put switch Sl on
resistor R2. This diode is used to pro- LEDs. Each board consists of 130 to the table of the user.
tect the IC from back emf. 175 LEDs connected in series. When the supply is connected and
When the supply is connected, ca- Board I indicates the message WAIT S1 is off, the relay is in off state. There-
pacitor C2 begins to charge. As capaci- PLEASE. Power supply is connected to fore, 9V DC appears across the flash-
tor C2 gets charged to a voltage lower this board from the triac through R9, a ing unit. Now, the first board starts
than 1/3 Vcc, pin 2 of IC1 is triggered 1.8k, 2W resistor. Board II flashes the flashing WAIT PLEASE. The flashing
and the output goes high, turning the message COME IN PLEASE. It gets sup- period can be varied through potenti-
triac on. When capacitor C2 gets ply from the N/O terminal of relay RL- ometer VR1.
charged to 2/3 Vcc, pin 6 gets trig- A through R10, a 1.8k, 2W resistor. When Switch Sl is pressed, the re-
gered and the output goes low, the triac The brightness of these LEDs can be lay is energised and the second board
turns off. On-off period of the triac can changed by using suitable values for indicates COME IN PLEASE, as this
be adjusted by VR1. resistors for R10 and R9. board gets supply from N/O terminal
The alarm unit is built around tran- Make two plywood boxes of the of relay RL-A. The alarm unit also turns
sistors BEL187 and BC147. An 8-ohm size of the display boards and fix on as it gets supply from the N/O con-
speaker is used. Inplace of this alarm the boards inside the plywood boxes. tact of relay RL-B.
circuit, you may use any other musical Close the front side of these boxes As the visitor enters the cabin, the
sound circuit or COB with the ampli- with transparent glass. Fix the alarm user releases switch Sl, so that the sec-
fier. circuit in another small box. Fix the ond board and alarm are cut off and
There are two display boards in the two boards and the alarm unit on the board I again indicates WAIT PLEASE.

HEN SOUND EMULATOR
K.A. SAKTHIDHARAN
T his circuit is capable of prod-

ucing a sound which is similar to
that which a hen usually produces when
ceived at its pin 7.
The sound produced will be like
that of a Morse code, containing three
VR3. To get an exact replica of hen or
cock sounds, try different values for
capacitor C3.
it is alarmed or after laying an egg. dots followed by a dash (-). The fre- The circuit can produce a number
The first two NOR gates (a and b) quency and pitch of the dash should be of sound effects, like those of robots,
of IC1 are wired as a low frequency higher than that of dots. This can be computers, birds, space talk etc after
oscillator. The frequency, which achieved by adjusting presets VR2 and minor changes.
should be below 1 Hz, can be
varied by adjusting preset VR1.
The output of this oscillator is
applied to the clock-input pin
14 of IC2, which is a decade
counter.
The first three alternate out-
puts of IC2 are connected to pin
7 of IC3 through preset VR2 and
three diodes D1-D3. The seventh
and ninth outputs are given to
the set and reset inputs of a flip-
flop, which is formed by the com-
bination of two other NOR gates
(c and d). When pin 8 of gate c
receives a high pulse, it will re-
tain a high voltage at pin 11 of
gate d, until its pin 13 receives
a high pulse. The audio frequency
produced by the timer IC 555
depends upon the voltage re-
PHONE LINE MONITOR

PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
S everal telephones, when connected

to a single line, are generally con-
nected in parallel. Sometimes, it is nec-
to 48V DC. A load of about 200-ohm
appears across the line when a
single handset is lifted. This voltage
transistor switch is activated that lights
up another LED.
When the line voltage is more than
essary to know the number of phones, suddenly drops to 9V with one handset 35V, transistor Tl switches on
connected to the line at a particular lifted and to about 5V with two hand- through base bias from diodes D5 and
moment. The circuit described here can sets lifted. The monitor indicates this D6, and switches off the CCS transis-
perform this function. It does not state by glowing two different LEDs. tor T2, so that no LED can glow. This
interrupt normal telephone operation The basic circuit is a constant cur- is the idle state of monitor when it
and draws power from the telephone rent source (CCS) that remains off at draws about 1 mA.
line itself. voltages greater than 35V. At 9V the When the supply voltage drops to
Telephone lines operate at 40 CCS switches on and at 5V, a single- about 9V, transistor Tl becomes off and

lifted, the voltage becomes 5V. Thus,
transistor T3 switches off and causes
LED1 to glow. This indicates another
receiver has been lifted. The current
through LED now is 5 to 7 mA.
A bridge rectifier is employed as a
polarity guard. The values of resistors
Rl, R4 and R5 may need to be ad-
justed. As the current through LEDs is
very small, high efficiency LEDs
should be used.
The gadget can be housed in a
small plastic box and may be placed
near a telephone terminal. This equip-
ment is very useful for PCO and
EPABX users.
The circuit can be modified, us-
ing high-power load, instead of LEDs.
It can also be used as a voltage moni-
switches on the CCS transistor T2. But In this state the current supply is about tor to measure low voltage on line, if
transistor T3 being on, only LED2 2 to 3 mA. any.
glows to indicate that a handset is lifted. As soon as the second receiver is
IMPROVED PEST REPELLER

PRADEEP G.
T he circuit employs four CMOS

ICs. IC1 works as a clock pulse
generator for IC2, which is a CMOS
The frequency of oscillator is varied
by about 10 kHz in four steps. The
circuit works effectively up to five
frequency of 40 kHz. This frequency is
sufficient to repel pests and at the same
time is inaudible to human beings.
shift register. IC3 is 7555, the popular metres. IC4 also drives an ultrasonic trans-
timer wired as astable flip-flop which IC4 is a D-type flip-flop for obtain- mitter-transducer. All presets VR1 to
oscillates at about 80 kHz frequency. ing symmetrical output at an average VR4 are of 10k type, but have been set
to different values.

Readers Comments: 3. The last line about the circuit used to repel pests like mosquitoes and
With reference to the circuit idea, some mentioned All presets VR1 to VR4 cockroaches. All diodes in the circuit
clarifications are needed: are of 10k type, but have been set to are 1N4148, presets VR2 to VR5 are
1. Most of the pest repellers avail- different values, whereas in the cir- 10k type.
able in the market are not very effec- cuit diagram VR1 is shown to be of An ultrasonic transducer is used at
tive against mosquitoes and cock- 1M and VR2 to VR5 are 10k. Again, the output. Ordinary paper cone loud-
roaches. I want to know whether nothing is mentioned about how to set speakers are not recommended.
this repeller is an improved one to repell the presets. The frequency range of this trans-
mosquitoes and cockroaches 4. In the circuit, no information ducer should be 30kHz to 50kHz for
effectively? is given about the type of the speaker maximum effectiveness.
2. Four diodes are used across the used. A frequency counter may be used
presets VR2 to VR5, but no specifica- to adjust presets VR2-VR5, otherwise
tions are there in the circuit about the The author, Pradeep G., replies: it can be done by trial and error
type of the diodes. My pest repeller can be effectively method.
LOGIC LEVEL DETECTOR CUM

CONTINUITY TESTER
ASHISH AND PRAKASH MEHROTRA
T his is a logic level detection

circuit, with the facility of conti-
nuity testing.
The circuit is built around two
BC148C transistors, used as NOT gates
(RTL). When the input at probe A is
low or probe A is disconnected, the
display (LT543) shows L, indicating
low or zero logic. But when probe
A is at high logic, the display shows
H, indicating high or logic 1.
The circuit can also be used as a
continuity tester by using probes B and
C. When there is a continuity between
B and C, the display will show C.
The given circuit uses FND LT543
display, but any common-cathode dis-
play can be used instead.
FLORA CARETAKER
AMRIT BIR TIWANA
N ext time you will not have to think

twice before going out on a holi-
day, just because of your plants, which
might dry up without your care. Here
is a flora care taker that will take ad-
equate care of your plants.

Two sensor probes, about 40 cm
each, are inserted into the soil at a
suitable location. The preset VR1 in
series, with the soil resistance between
the probes, forms one arm of a poten-
tiometer, while resistor R1 in series
with preset VR2 forms the other arm.
The resistance between the probes in-
creases as the moisture in the soil de-
creases.
When the moisture in the soil is
low (below some preset limit set by
VR1), the input voltage to gate N1 goes
low and its output goes high.
As a result transistor T1 begins to con-
duct and activates the spray pump,
through the relay. At the same time
capacitor C1 begins to charge.
After lapse of a certain amount of time
called spray time, determined by
preset VR3, the voltage across capaci-
tor C1 reaches the logic high level. pump turns off. ner next time. Presets VR1 and VR2
This causes the output of gate N2 to go A 20 mega-ohm resistor, which is are used to set the sensitivity. VR3 is
low, cutting off transistor T1 and in parallel to C1, ensures that the cir- used to set the time for which the cen-
the relay. As a consequence, the spray cuit is ready to work in the same man- trally placed pump sprays water.
ELECTRONIC CANDLE
MANGESH M. KASBEKAR
T he circuit uses a bulb in place of

the candle-flame, which can be
lighted with a matchstick and blown
out like a conventional candle.
An LDR is used for sensing light
from a matchstick. When illuminated,
the LDR causes the voltage at pin 2 of
IC2(NE555) to go lower than one-third
Vcc. The output voltage from IC2 goes
high and switches on the bulb.
On blowing at the thermistor, its
temperature falls, though slightly, and
the voltage across it increases by about
0.4V.
IC1 (A741) is wired as a compara- to go low, and thus switching off the from the bulb. As the three compo-
tor. The reference input is obtained from bulb. nents have a common ground terminal,
a potential divider circuit, built around It takes one to two seconds for the only four wires are to be taken up
resistor R2 and preset VR1. Under nor- thermistor to heat up again and the out- through the hole in the candle.
mal conditions, the output of the com- put of the comparator to settle to the After switching on the supply, al-
parator is the lower saturation voltage. lower saturation voltage. During this low a preheating period of at least 21/2
Due to the voltage rise across the ther- period, the candle cannot be lighted minutes. Then, adjust the preset such
mistor, the output of the comparator again. that the output of the comparator just
switches to the upper saturation volt- Mount the bulb, the thermistor and reaches the lower saturation voltage.
age (+Vsat >2Vcc/ 3.) This voltage ap- the LDR on the top of a candle, with The circuit does not cost more than
pears at pin 6 of IC2, causing its output the light-sensitive face of the LDR away Rs35.

MOTOR PROTECTOR AND WATER
LEVEL INDICATOR
R. BALAJI
T he circuit protects motor pumps

running under no-load condition,
i.e. when there is no water in the pump.
The working of the circuit is facilitated
by the indication of bulb 1, which lights
up only during presence of water in the
pump.
When there is no water in the pump,
probes 1 and 2 are open and transistor
T1 remains non-conducting. Generally,
when the motor is switched on, it takes
5 to 6 seconds for water to reach the the pump is running on load. But if the the water in the tank is full. Probes 1
delivery pipe end A. During this period bulb does not glow even after 5 or 6 and 3 form a closed circuit path as the
transistor Tl does not conduct. As wa- seconds, this is an indication that the tank becomes full. Transistor T2 con-
ter reaches point A, probes 1 and 2 get pump or borewell is dry and the motor ducts and results in the bulb 2 glowing.
closed and Tl conducts, causing bulb 1 should be switched off under such con- When bulb 2 glows, the motor is to be
to glow. ditions. switched off, so as to prevent the over-
Glowing of bulb 1 indicates that In a similar way, bulb 2 glows when flow of water.
360W HI-FI STEREO POWER AMPLIFIER

N.S. HARISHANKAR
T his Hi-Fi amplifier

produces 360W (180+
180) PMPO into a 4-ohm load.
The amplifier is built around
the STK 461 chip, which needs
a dual supply of +21V at 5A
continuous rating.
The 42V DC symmetrical
supply is used, so that no elec-
trolytic capacitors are needed
in the output stage. Use of
large, thick and fanned heatsink
is recommended for cooling the
STK chip within its permissible
limit(105OC max.).
The 15-0-15V, 5A supply is
rectified by a high-current
bridge rectifier and filtered by

suitable capacitors. of 50W RMS rating for good quality STK459 chip can be used in the
STK 461 is protected against short and long life. The circuit was tested same way to produce 300W PMPO.
circuit by a 2.5A fuse in series with the with the universal 240W (120+ 120) STK459 needs a DC supply of + 16V
loudspeaker. The speakers should be premplifier. at 5A.
Readers Comments: The author has used very highly rated The maximum supply recom-
Please clarify the following doubts re- 1F, 63V capacitors for C2 and C9, mended for STK461 is +21V for 8-
garding the circuit idea for 360W Hi- while a lower rate 1F, 25V capacitors ohm load. A 15V-0-15V supply would
Fi Stereo Power Amplifier: would have sufficed. Similarly, a 100F, produce the required +21V DC after
1. The author has recommended 25V rated capacitor would suffice for rectification by diode and filteration
50W RMS speakers, whereas the out- C11 (in place of 100F, 63V). by capacitor.
put is of the order of 125W RMS (180W Whats the cost of IC STK461 and Regarding Mr Khatris letter, lower
PMPO) in each channel! where from can it be obtained? voltage rated capacitors may be used
2. In the beginning of the text, it is Pawan Kumar Khatri for C2, C9 and C11, provided these are
mentioned that the amplifier needs a Jodhpur of good quality.
+21V @5A supply, but later the author IC STK461 may cost anywhere be-
states that a 15V-0V-15V supply @5A The author, Mr N.S. Harishankar, tween Rs 300 and 450. For its pin con-
can be used. replies: figuration, one may refer Sanyo 87/88
Chetan Khanna The output at 1 kHz is 45W RMS. Semiconductor STK Data and Appli-
New Delhi So, 50W RMS speakers are all-right. cation book.
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY WITH

SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
A regulated power supply is very

essential for the proper functioning
of a circuit. The regulated power sup-
ply described here is an IC based,
ripple-free power supply which keeps
its output voltage constant even with
variations in the input voltage. It also
protects the supply by disconnecting
itself when any short circuit occurs in
the output line.
The power supply is configured
around the versatile op-amp IC LM741.
The voltage at its non-inverting input
pin 3 is maintained constant with
the help of zener D2, which determines
the output voltage. Resistor Rl is used
to limit the current through zener D2.
The output of IC1 at pin 6 is fed to
the base of series regulator transistor
Tl through resistor R2. The base volt- connected to a voltage divider at the voltage the output of IC1 changes to
age of Tl, determines the voltage drop output. suit the base current of transistor
across the emitter and collector (Vce) Thus, in the beginning, the differ- T1, which in turn controls the output
of T1, thus resulting in the selection of ential voltage between the inverting and voltage.
the output voltage. non-inverting pins switches on The short-circuit protection system
The inverting pin 2 of IC1 is Tl. With a variation in the input is built around transistor T2. If a large

current flows through the output, i.e. in this way safe-guards against any short the output voltage and maximum short
case of a short circuit, the voltage drop circuit. circuit current limit by proper selec-
across resistor R3 increases sufficiently All the components are readily tion of zener D2 and resistor R3. These
to switch on transistor T2. T2 applies available in the market. The circuit can components can be changed according
reverse bias to Tl, which in turn be constructed on an IC veroboard. to the users requirement.
switches off the output supply, and in The circuit provides flexibility in
Readers Comments: 5. Please mention the changes in for short circuit protection. The current
Could the author please suggest the use the modified circuit diagram. rating depends upon T1 and hence tran-
of this circuit for conversion from 24V 6. Can we replace SL100 transistor sistor 2N3055 may be used. But it is
DC to 12V DC? However, if this is not with 2N3055, if more current (say 500 also necessary to adjust R3 for short
possible then please suggest any other mA) is to be drawn? circuit protection.
circuit. P. Ghosh Regarding Mr Rajpalis queries,
If we use 24-48V DC as input in Howrah the circuit may not work in 24-28VDC
the given circuit, can we get 12V DC In the above circuit, the author used range, but he can try the circuit with
regulated at the output after varying only one SL100 transistor to power the a series resistor in supply of IC 741
VR1? circuit. I think it is better to use two only to control the output. Otherwise,
G.D. Rajpali transistors in Darlington mode to boost he may try to use a linear regulator
Ghaziabad the current. for 12V regulated output. But a linear
I want the author to comment on the I want the author to comment. regulator will waste much power if
following queries: Pawan Kumar Khatri sufficient current is drawn. Here,
1. Can I feed maximum of 15 Jodhpur. we can use a 7812(12V) regulator
volts unregulated DC to obtain vari- too. VR1 is used as dummy load and
able DC voltage ranging 0V through The author, Pradip Kumar Bose, re- hence it will affect the output by its
12.5 volts. plies: movement, but to the minimum extent.
2. Are R1 and D1 proper to get the Regarding the queries of Mr Ghosh, Keep VR1 at half of its value in this
above required voltage range? the circuit can be used with up to 15- case.
3. I think the output voltage can be volt input. You can make a variable I agree with the reader from
varied from 1.5 volts to 12.6 volts with power supply by varying voltage at pin Jodhpur with regard to connection
the help of VR1. 3 of IC 741. This can be done in sev- of a Darlington pair, instead of
4. What is the maximum value of eral ways; however, a zener with a pot. single SL100 for higher current con-
current to be drawn from the output at (variable) can be used. sumption.
12.6 volts? The circuit was basically designed
MUSICAL GREETING CARDS

IYER MAHESH NAGARAJAN
H ere is an electronic way of

greeting people through an elec-
tronic musical greeting card, based
Some of the
commonly used
UM series chips
on the UM series ICs. are UM3166,
The UM musical series ICs offers U M 5 1 6 2 ,
a wide range of musical application UM3561, UM66,
IC chips for use in greeting cards, in- etc. The circuits
terlude players, intercoms, toys etc. It using UM3562
requires a very low power supply, and UM66 have
ranging from 1.5Vto 3V, so that a already been pub-
small button cell can be placed inside lished in earlier is-
the greeting card as a power supply sues of EFY.
to the circuit. UM3166 series is

a complete melody generator chip, ca- built oscillators and memory programs. leaf switch is fixed inside the greeting
pable of directly driving a small piezo Since the circuit incorporates a card in such a way that on opening the
buzzer. single IC with a resistor, battery and a card the two terminals of the leaf switch
The UM series ICs function with in- leaf switch, no PCB is required. The make contact with each other.
Readers Comments:
I request the author of the very inter-
esting Musical Greeting Cards circuit
idea to answer:
1. Whats the approx. cost of the
UM3166 IC and the piezo buzzer?
2. How can I replace the piezo
buzzer with and 8-ohm speaker?
3. What use are the pins 5, 6 and 8
of the UM3166?
Bimlendu Shekhar
Bihar
The author, Mr Iyer Mahesh Nagar-

ajan, replies:
The piezo buffer and the UM3166
ICs are available in a small plastic pack- In my original manuscript, I had not published. It is now being repro-
age which is as thick as a card. So, it is also included a diagram for using the duced above.
easily hidden in a greeting card. The IC as a melody generator/doorbell, Pins 5, 6 and 8 of the IC 3166 have
package costs around Rs 25 in Bombay. with an external amplifier, which was to be grounded.
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED FAN

CHHAJED MAHAVIR D.
T he system described here is quite

useful during summers, since it
automatically controls the speed of
linearly @ 10mV/C.
This voltage is passed through
a buffer (IC2) and then applied
circuit is obtained
Rl, Dl, D2, Cl and C2.
through
The voltages at the respective points

a fan. Speed control is determined to the non-inverting inputs of are as shown in Table I. These voltages
by the outside temperature. Normally, IC3 through IC7 (CA3140). A refer- should be measured accurately with a
a fan operates at three to five ence voltage obtained from resistor R7, digital multimeter. Voltages at no two
speeds. This circuit offers upto five the 3.3V zener D3 and the ladder points should be equal, which means
speeds for a fan. Besides, it provides circuit configured around resistors that no two LEDs should glow at the
a visual indication of the speed of R8 through R14, is applied to same time.
the fan. the inverting inputs of IC3 through The 100-ohm resistors (R9 to R13)
The electronic temperature con- IC7. The ladder resistances should can be replaced by 100-ohm presets to
trolled fan given here is cheap, quite have one per cent tolerance for get more accurate voltages at points A
accurate and effective. The tempera- accuracy. to E.
ture is easily set to cover a wide In order to reduce the size of
TABLE I
range, viz, 10OC to 30C or 3OC to the system and to have greater reliabil-
22C. This increases the reliability and ity, triacs have been used in place of re- Point Voltage
versatility of the device. lays. A 2.94V
Temperature is converted into Triacs 2, 3 and 4 should be con- B 2.97V
voltage by LM335 which holds its nected to points 2, 3 and 4 of the regu- C 3V
voltage at 2.73V at 0C. As the tem- lator respectively, which is not shown D 3.03V
perature increases, the voltage increases in the circuit. A 12V supply for the E 3.06V

Readers Comments: name the triacs which can be used in age for CA3140B (Bi-MOS op-amp) is
The circuit for Temperature the circuit. 2mV (max.) while it is 9mV
Controlled Fan is excellent, but Saji K.M. for LM324 and 7mV for CA 1458,
the author has not taken care of Cochin which may bring instability to the
cost. Instead of the six CA3140 The circuit idea of Temperature Con- circuit.
op-amp ICs, it is better to use one trolled Fan is very interesting. The au- LM335 may be obtained from Kits
LM324 (quad op-amp) and one thor is requested to clarify the follow- n Spares, 303 Dohil Chambers, 46
LM1458 (dual op-amp). This will re- ing: Nehru Place, New Delhi 110 019.
duce the cost as well as the space re- How can we replace the tempera- IC LM335 is a temperature sensing
quired on the PCB, besides reducing ture sensors (LM335) in the circuit? If device, which should be kept far away
the wiring. the sensor is kept near the fan, it will from the fan. It should be placed at a
What is the cost of LM335 and cool down by itself. Thus, the circuit proper place to sense the temperature
wherefrom can it be obtained? will not work properly. of the room.
Pawan Kumar Khatri Regarding Sajis letter, the temp-
Jodhpur The author, Chhajed Mahavir D., erature range of the circuit may be
I want the author to kindly clarify comments: changed by altering the voltage levels
the following problems concerning the In temperature controlled devices, at points A and E. The given voltage
above article. accuracy and stability of the circuit is levels in Table I are the tempera-
1. How can we adjust the tempera- more important than the size and cost ture range of 21 o C to 33 o C. The
ture range and its setting? of the circuit. phase and neutral wires can be inter-
2. Is there any problem if the phase As in my circuit the output of changed.
and neutral wires are interchanged? IC2 increases linearly @ 10mV/oC, You can use any 4A, 400V triac as
3. Specifications for the triac are the input offset voltage is of more mentioned in the circuit, viz, ST044,
not mentioned in the circuit; please importance. The input offset volt- BT136, etc.

LINE SYNCHRONISED
OSCILLATOR
V. VIDYALAL, K. RAJASREE AND V. SIVANAND
T his circuit is useful for triggering

circuits which need a 50Hz square
waveform derived from AC mains.
A monitor output is provided at pin
3 of IC2. The signal is buffered and is
available at the collector of transistor
This circuit, due to its compactness,
lower component count, and rugged-
ness, can be easily incorporated into
Such sources are being increasingly T2 with slight amplification. LED1 in- older model oscilloscopes which do not
used and incorporated in
modern oscilloscopes and
waveform generators.
ICl is a 741op-amp,
configured as a comparator.
It squares the 50Hz signal
reduced by the transformer
and resistor network. Off-
set voltages of the op-amp
can be trimmed by pot.
VR1. The output from the
comparator is fed to a resis-
tor - diode network, com-
prising resistor R6 and di-
ode Dl, which cuts off the
negative part of the signal
and ensures only positive
triggering of IC2.
This waveform is fed to
the clock input of decade
counter CD4017B(IC2).
The output Q5 at pin 1 of
IC2 is connected to the re-
set pin 15, and clock enable pin 13 is dicates presence of the signal and is have this facility. Moreover, the signal
grounded. Q0 output is taken from pin also useful for optical fibre coupled source is fully isolated from the mains
3. This configuration finally results in applications and/or for optocoupler and can be optically routed.
an undistorted 50Hz square wave. coupled isolated mains circuits.
ELECTRONIC FUSE
B. JAYAPRAKASH
T his gadget trips the supply in case

of a short circuit or an overload.
The circuit is based on the fact
of current passing.
The voltage drop across Rl or R2 is
compared against the reference volt-
according to ones requirement.
If the current to load exceeds the
predetermined level, the output of
that when a current flows through age set at the non-inverting input of the comparartor (IC1) goes low. At the
resistors Rl and R2, there is a voltage 741 IC, used as comparator. The cur- same time, transistor T2 is cut off,
drop, proportional to the amount rent limit can be set by adjusting VR1, which in turn cuts off transistor Tl.

Relay RL1 is thus de-energised. Since the predetermined level flows into the Calibration can be done according
no current flows into the load, the volt- load, the relay is de-energised and to ones current requirement. If a cur-
age drop is zero. In this condition, the LED1 glows to indicate this state. rent limit of 5A, say, is chosen, the
output of IC1 goes high once again, To activate the relay again, push voltage drop across resistors Rl and R2
which makes the Ql output of IC2 switch Sl which would reset IC2, will be 2.5V, which requires the refer-
(CD4017) to go high. thereby energising the relay if, and only ence voltage to be set at 2.5V, so as to
As Q1 goes high, LED1 glows. if, the current is less than the pre- cut off the supply to load, whenever
Thus, whenever a current greater than determined level. current exceeds 5A.
POLARITY TESTER
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
T his polarity tester can detect the

polarity of a supply voltage of 3
to 30V and indicate the same with an
If reverse
polarity is con-
nected, diode Dl
LED. The tester can be used for digi- conducts. As a re-
tal circuits to check the polarity of sult, transistors Tl
the supply unit. and T2 both switch
The circuit is basically a constant off and LED1 does
current source, which drives an LED. not glow. The
The CCS (constant current source) is switch Sl is meant
connected to a transistor switch which for connecting
turns on when the correct polarity of LED1 to internal
supply is connected. or external circuit,
Diode D2 makes the base voltage as required.
of transistor T2 constant, as a result of The tester can
which the collector current of T2 be- be assembled on a
comes a constant current source. On voltage, transistor Tl turns on and small veroboard, in a small cabinet.
connecting correct polarity of input test switches the CCS to drive LED 1.

LOW-COST 4- TO 16-LINE DECODER
PRADEEP P. KAVI
T his is a 4- to 16-line decoder

circuit that uses a minimum num-
ber of, cheap and easily available com-
ponents. The circuit provides a suit-
able replacement for the 4- to 16-line
decoder IC 74154, which is quite ex-
pensive.
The circuit comprises four ICs. IC1
NE555 is wired in the astable mode.
Its frequency can be varied by the 1M
potentiometer VR1. The clock pulses
from IC1 are fed to IC2 SN7493, which
is a 4-bit binary counter.
Two SN7442 ICs (IC3 and IC4) pro-
vide the 4 to 16-line decoding func-
tion. IC3 decodes the 4-bit inputs from
0 (0000) to 7 (0111) and IC4 decodes
the inputs beyond 7, i.e. from 8 to 15.

Transistor Tl BC548B functions as an Hence, for an output of 8 (1000) from The speed of the running LEDs can
inverter (NOT gate) for the D input IC2, the input to IC4 will be 0 (0000), be adjusted by potentiometer VR1. The
to IC4. and so on. whole circuit can be assembled on a
For inputs beyond 7, i.e. from 8 The truth table for the circuit is also general-purpose PCB, at a cost of Rs
(1000) to 15 (1111), IC4 counts from 0 given. At any instant, only one LED 60 to 70 approx.
to 7, since the input to IC4 is DCBA. will glow.
AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL

AMRIT BIR TIWANA
T his automatic volume control can

be incorporated into any audio
equipment, using a few discrete com-
ume is maintained
nearly constant. A
capacitor, ranging
ponents, as described below. from 220nF to 4.7F
The circuit is connected with the (16V), may be con-
output and volume control of the AF nected across the
amplifier section of the equipment. base of transistor Tl
When the input signal strength rises, to attenuate the
diode Dl will conduct and tend to short changes.
the upper terminal and ground of the Preset VR1 sets
volume control, hence reducing the out- the sensitivity and
put. level of automatic
The reverse happens in case the in- volume control.
put signal drops. Hence, the output vol-
MUSICAL CONTINUITY TESTER

PRADEEP G.
T he circuit described here is very

useful in checking the continuity
of low resistance coils, speakers, IFTs,
small audio transformers, etc. A spe-
cial feature of this continuity tester is a
low supply voltage (2-3V) and a low
quiescent current (1.5mA at 3V).
IC1 TLC251 (or TLC271) is an op-
amp, wired as a comparator. When an
external low resistance is connected
across the probes, output of IC1 goes
high and IC2 UM66, the popular melody
generator, gets supply voltage. Music
signals, generated at the output of IC2,
are amplified by transistor Tl, which
directly drives a low wattage speaker.
This continuity tester can be used to
check low resistances only, and not high
resistances or semiconductor devices.
HI-Q STEREO MIXER
K.K. MURTY
T his two-channel stereo mixer uses

two LA3161 ICs and some related
components. These ICs are commonly
used in the preamplifier stage of car
stereo amplifiers.
The circuit was originally designed
to satisfy the needs of a classical
musician for recording on his stereo
deck, with at least four microphones,

and it performed well. ern low-impedance microphones well. 9V DC. Diode-capacitor combinations
It can be converted into a four-chan- Its output is connected to the mic. in- of D6-C20 and D7-C21 decouple ICl
nel mono mixer by closing switch S1. put of the main amplifier or stereo deck. and IC2.
We can stack more LA3161 ICs to get The power supply required for it is
more inputs. The circuit suits the mod- straightforward, regulated and hum-free
1Hz MASTER OSCILLATOR

VIBIN ANDREWS K.
T he circuit presented here is of an

inexpensive 1Hz master oscilla-
tor. It uses only a few components, but
gives satisfactory results.
The multivibrator, wired around
gate Nl, produces 10Hz pulses. These
are divided by 10 to produce 1Hz
pulses.
Capacitor Cl is connected between
the input of the gate and ground. The
output of N1 is fed back to the input
via potentiometer VR1 and resistor Rl.
The capacitor is either charged or dis-
charged, depending on the logic level level, the output of schmitt gate Nl get 1Hz output.
at the output of Nl. toggles. The values of Rl and Cl are so In order to get accurate output
Whenever voltage across the capaci- chosen that they produce pulses @ pulses, the l0Hz generator must be ad-
tor reaches the threshold trigger l0Hz, which are then divided by IC2 to justed to the correct frequency by means
of potentiometer VRl.
SUPER SIMPLE TIMER

SUPRAVAT DAS
H ere is a very simple, low-cost and

useful timer circuit. It will auto-
matically turn off power to your TV,
VCR, radio, tape recorder or any other
electronic equipment after a predeter-
mined period.
The circuit basically uses only two
transistors as a Darlington pair and a
6V relay.
When you push switches Sl and
S2 at the same time, capacitor C1
charges to about 9V and this voltage
goes through preset VR1 and R2 to
the base of transistor Tl. The relay
energises and its N/C contacts open
and the common point gets connected

to N/O contacts. Due to base current to the N/C points. E, N and L points, and the device
drawn by Tl, capacitor Cl discharges This circuit can be housed in a plas- to be controlled may be plugged into
after some time and the relay cuts off, tic or a metal cabinet. A 3-pin socket this socket. You can vary the time pe-
connecting the relays common point may be fitted on this cabinet for the riod by adjusting the 1M preset VR1.
STEREO DISCONNECTOR
WITH TIMER
PRADEEP G.
W hen you are enjoying loud

western music or other songs on
your stereo, and if a visitor comes and
house. So, when the electric bell is rung,
a low DC voltage gets applied to the
LED of opto-coupler IC1. As the opto-
ected through N/C contacts of the relay
for a few seconds. The switch-off pe-
riod is determined by potentiometer
presses the calling bell switch, you may couplers LED glows, the photo-tran- VR1, connected in the 555 timer circuit.
not hear the bell due to loud sound from sistor inside IC1 conducts. As a result, Thus, you can hear the bell clearly
the stereo deck. The circuit shown here IC2 (555), which is in monostable mode, even when your stereo is on. Besides,
provides a remedy for this problem. gets triggered. So, output of 555 goes the red LED connected across the relay
The input of this circuit is connected high and the relay gets activated. This lights up to indicate that the timer is
in parallel to the electric bell of your switches off the stereo set conn- on.
Readers Comments: system is on. former is controlled via relay RL1

The circuit of Stereo Disconnector 2. The opto-coupler further in- in such a manner that it connects to the
with Timer is very interesting and use- creases the cost of the circuit. mains only when the push-button is
ful, but has some drawbacks: The circuit shown here excludes pressed, otherwise it remains
1. The circuit requires contin- opto-coupler, but bears all the features disconnected from the mains. Thus, the
uous power supply, while the stereo at much lower cost. Also, the trans- transformer works only for a short time,

which is equal to the on-time period of
the IC 555. Thus, the misuse of trans-
former and power both are avoided.
Generally, double-pole push-to-on
switches are not available; use of two
single-pole pushbutton switches, con-
nected with a common yoke, is recom-
mended.
Vidyut Sarkar
The author, Pradeep G., replies:

Use of opto-coupler can indeed be
avoided by using a transformer. Con-
sumption of electricity is minimised
with this modified circuit, but the cir-
cuit can be modified in many ways.
However, I agree with the modifica-
tions, done by Mr Sarkar.
FREQUENCY FILTER FOR

PLAYING OLD RECORDS
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
W hen old records become dusty,

the non-linear movement of sty-
lus over the record produces a variable
and irregular voltage, which produces
noise when amplified. With this filter,
you can now play worn-out records,
with much better results. This device is
basically an RC-coupled two-stage am-
plifier with several capacitive and re-

sistive controls for frequency selection. preamplifier and the power amplifier comes minimum. Now, adjust dual po-
A ganged band switch with several fil- of the record players circuitry. For a tentiometer VR1 and VR2 to get proper
ter capacitors is used for selection. Also, stereo player, two units are required. and desired level of sound. Every time
a ganged potentiometer is used for the The supply may be drawn from the DC you play old records, you will have to
desired level. Several other networks supply of the record player. adjust VR1/ VR2 and switch Sl.
are used for perfect filtration. Play an old record and place switch Keep the connecting wires as short
Connect this device between the Sl in such a position that the noise be- as possible to reduce humming noise.
STATIC STARTER
AMRIT BIR TIWANA
C onventional starters used with

fluorescent tubelights are often the
cause of much interference and hum.
These are also prone to become defec-
tive soon, just for the reason that the
gas may leak out or the contacts may
burn out.
The circuit presented here can be
used as a direct replacement for the
same. It can fit within the same enclo-
sure.
The circuit uses two series-con- vide the same action of switching cur- the mains voltage ratings (28V diac for
nected diacs and a diode, all in parallel rent as the starter. The diac may be 220V AC).
across a filter capacitor . These pro- selected for general use, depending on
HEADPHONE ADAPTOR FOR

HI-FI STEREO
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
I f you wish to listen to your hi-fi

stereo through the headphone of your
personal stereo (such as a Walkman),
here is an adaptor you can use for the
purpose.
The adaptor basically comprises a
divider network with a simple delay
line. It simulates cross field for stereo
effect and introduces delay for identi-
cal stereo sound from both channels.
The circuit has been designed for an
average 8cm difference headphone.
Coils LI and L2 should be closely
wound on 5mm dia ferrite cores, with
100 turns of 33SWG enamelled copper

wire in each case. you hear equal volume in your both in headphones is too high or too low,
After assembly, connect the adaptor ears. The balance control (VR3) should try changing the values of resistors Rl
between your hi-fi stereo amplifer and be kept at its mid position. through R4, one by one, till you get the
the headphones of your personal stereo. Sometimes, a better result can be sound of your choice. You may also
Keeping the volume of stereo amplifier obtained by changing the values of net- adjust potentiometers VR1 and VR2
low, adjust VR1 and VR2 slowly till work resistor and capacitor. If the sound for the purpose.
LINEAR BULB LIGHT CONTROLLER

B.S. MALIK
A s light dimmers generally avail-

able in the market are non-linear,
users find it inconvenient to use them,
firing angle of SCR and makes the
bulb glow brighter. The opposite
happens if T1 conducts less. In this
the 100W bulb on for about 15
minutes at its maximum intensity, and
then switch it off and disconnect the
as they cause abrupt change in inten- way, the light intensity of a 100W mains supply. Check the temperatures
sity. The circuit for linear control of bulb gets varied from minimum to of T1 and SCR. They should be
light is given here, with which a
100W bulb may be used to work
as 15W, 40W or 60W bulb, as
per requirement.
On/off switch Sl for the con-
troller is fitted on potentiometer
VR1. Resistors Rl and R2, ze-
ner D5 and pot. VR1 provide
the emitter-bias circuit for UJT
Tl. Capacitor Cl is a wave
shaper. Zener D5 operates
above 12 volts and regulates the
biasing voltage for transistor Tl.
Capacitor C2 smoothes DC
voltage at the emitter of Tl. Re-
sistor R2 provides bias to B2
terminal and R4 to Bl terminal
of Tl. Capacitor C3 smoothes
gate triggering voltage of SCR and maximum. So, it can be used as a at their normal temperatures, and not
avoids false triggering. 15W or lower wattage bulb, while go- in an overheated state. Resistors Rl and
When S1 is switched on, 230V ing to bed, and a 60W bulb or so R2 should not be too hot either. Other-
AC is rectified by the bridge, formed while reading. wise, change their values to 10k, 2W
by diodes Dl through D4. Positive The circuit can be wired on a small each.
voltage gets applied to one end of general-purpose PCB or veroboard Some of the precautions that need
the load (a 100W bulb), while the of about 5.5cms x 4cms and fitted to be taken are:
negative goes to cathode of SCR within the base of a table lamp or in- 1. Do not use an airtight box for the
through a 1A fuse. DC current, flowing side a switchboard in a room. Pot. VR1 circuit; leave a few holes in the box for
through resistors Rl and R2, breaks may be fitted firmly on the PCB air circulation.
down zener D5 to regulate the 12V and controlled through a small knob. A 2. Do not forget to disconnect the
DC. small heatsink should be used for the circuit from mains, while checking the
Pot. VR1 varies the emitter volt- SCR. components.
age of unijunction transistor Tl, which To test the circuit after wiring, 3. The circuit should be fitted away
in turn varies the conduction of switch-on Sl and vary pot. VR1 slowly. from a radio receiver to avoid interfer-
Tl. So, voltage drop across resistor The intensity of bulb light should ence in the latter.
R4 varies accordingly. This is applied vary linearly (and not abruptly) with 4. Use a suitable heatsink with the
to the gate of SCR to control its the rotation of the pots knob. If it does SCR.
angle of firing. Increase in voltage not vary gradually, replace capacitor The circuit will cost approx. Rs 90
across resistor R4 increases the C2 with a lF, 63V capacitor. Switch to build.

Readers Comments: the idea is not quite reliable! nected in series with the bulb to AC
Is it possible to use triac, instead of The cost of the circuit is more than mains, otherwise SCR/triac will show
SCR by connecting the bulb directly to Rs 100 against Rs 90, mentioned in the the same result.
the AC mains? circuit. 2. Regarding the letter of Mr
Pawan Kumar Khatri Rajesh Kothari Kothari, the circuit can be used as a
Jodhpur Chitardurga, Karnataka regulator for iron and tubelight etc, af-
I have assembled the circuit, but get- ter replacing rectifier diodes and SCR
ting a fluctuated output. The wattage is The author, B.S. Malik, replies: suitably.
below 30 watts. Is it possible to use I am very thankful to the readers 3. Cost of components varies from
this circuit as regular for an iron or a for their keen interest in my circuit. time to time and place to place; so it
tubelight? 1. Triac can be used in place of may be costlier at your location.
One more problem occurs when we SCR. But SCR has higher current/volt- 4. Mr Kothari is advised to use ex-
replace 2.2F, 63V capacitor with a age rating, as compared to triac. Also, act valued components to operate the
1F, 63V capacitor; the resistor (R1, it is possible that the intensity of the circuit successfully.
R2), SCR and UJT get heated up. So, bulb may increase. Triac should be con-
ELECTRONIC AUTOMOBILE HORN

K.A. SAKTHIDHARAN
T he commonly used automobile

horns are either electrical or air-
pressure type. While these horns are
The circuit is built around a CMOS
IC CD4001 or CD4011, which con-
tains four NOR/NAND gates. These
supply voltage, different values of R2
and R3 are required for 6 and 12-volt
operations.
generally unpleasant to hear, the air- gates are wired as two sets of astable The output of ICl is drawn from pin
pressure type horns in particular, con- multivibrators. One set works in au- 11 and applied to the input of IC2
tribute a lot to noise pollution. dio range, while the other oscillates through coupling capacitor C3. The au-
The pleasant and distinct tone, at about 2 Hz. dio amplifier is a monolithic TDA2002
generated by the electronic horn de- Both multivibrators are intercon- IC which can produce 6-watt output,
scribed below, cannot be ignored even nected through resistor Rl, so that the when working on a car battery. The
by an absent-minded pedestrian. It also low-frequency oscillator forces the au- gain of this amplifier is fixed at 100
abides by the regulations, according to dio oscillator to change its output fre- (R4/R5). The output is connected to a
the author, but it would be safer to quency continuously. Resistor R3 and 4-ohm, 10-watt tweeter.
recheck with the local authorities be- capacitor C2 determine the low fre- The volume of sound can be ad-
fore putting it to actual use. The horn quency, while resistor R2 and capaci- justed by preset VR1. Diode Dl, on
can be used with any vehicle, fitted tor Cl decide the audio frequency. Since the positive line, prevents any dam-
with a 12-volt or 6-volt battery. these frequencies are dependent on the age due to reverse polarity connec-

tion. A separate rectifier circuit is All components can be assembled insulate the PCB from the metallic parts
given with whose help the horn can on a general-purpose PCB. Use socket of the loudspeaker. A round shaped
be connected to a two-wheeler with- for IC1. The amplifier IC does not need plastic container can be used as the
out a battery (with AC dynamo). any heatsink. Use a thin plastic film to cabinet for the horn.
CALL BELL FOR THE IMPATIENT

K.N. SUNIL KUMAR
S ome people keep ringing the

calling bell impatiently, without
giving adequate time for the concerned
The outputs of both the timers are
combined in an AND gate. (Only
one AND gate of the triple 3-input
R6 and R7.
Both the timers are operated in
monostable mode. A momentary push
person to respond. This
calling bell will deacti-
vate for a minute after
it has already been rung.
Two 555 timers,
which are built into the
556 IC, get activated on
pushing switch Sl.
While one timer pro-
vides the delay of about
55 secondswith resis-
tor R3 and capacitor C3
deciding the delay pe-
riodthe other remains
on for about five sec-
onds. The 5-second de-
lay of the second timer
permits the bell to ring
for upto five seconds,
with resistor R2 and ca-
pacitor C2 deciding the
delay period.
Power supply for
the IC is provided by
the half-wave rectifier
cum stabiliser circuit,
comprising rectifier diode Dl, zener di- 74LS11 is put to use.) The 5V supply on switch S1 makes the output to go
ode D2, resistor Rl and filter capacitor for the TTL gate is provided from the high for the first five seconds. This
Cl. potential divider, comprising resistors triggers the triac and makes power
available for the calling bell circuit.
0-10V AMPLIFIER
DILIP KUMAR DE
A zero to 10V amplifier is useful in

line synchronisation where the
tacho or line speed referene voltage
hronising machine. It may be used in
taping head to synchronise and adjust
any lay length of polyester tape wrap-
increases or decreases, the ang-
ular speed of taping head will
change accordingly on account of this
source is too weak to drive a sync- ping on cable. Whenever line speed amplifier.

Two op-amps are used in the cir- a veroboard. Keeping the centre-tap ground and reconnect resistor R8 to
cuitone as an amplifier and the other of 100k preset in the middle, open point 2. The output is available at
as a scale changer. The offset null con- resistor R8 at point 2 and connect point 3.
dition, besides being universal in na- point 1 to ground. Set your multim- For testing in the laboratory, the
ture, minimises the common mode eter to the 10V DC range and con- potential divider circuit comprising
signal. nect across point 2 and ground. De- 22k preset VR3 and 12k resistor R12,
The amplifier draws very feeble cur- pending on the direction of deflection at the extreme right of the circuit, may
rent from the source for a full-scale of the multimeters needle rotate the be used. Connect VR3s centre-tap
output voltage. A voltage divider, com- 100k preset (with the help of a screw- (point 4) to the input (Vin). Vary
prising a 1k resistor R10 and a 100k driver) to the right or left till the meter the VR3 preset from its minimum to
resistor R11, is used at the output for shows no deflection of its needle. Re- maximum position, which will also
short-circuit protection. The circuit runs peat the process, this time keeping the vary the Vin voltage from its mini-
on a simple capacitor filtered power multimeter at 2.5V range. mum to maximum. The actual input
supply. After the above zero-setting has to the amplifier at point 1 is in the
The circuit may be assembled on been done, disconnect point 1 from range of 0 to 100 mV.
A SENSITIVE TOUCH SWITCH

SHASHANK WADIBHASME
T his switch will turn on an appli-

ance on first touch and switch it
off at the second. The circuit has an
stable multivibrator performs one
monostable operation. Its pulse width,
given by 1.1 x RC, is three to ten sec-
first latch is called the master, while the
second is called the slave. The master is
clocked by positive edge, but the slave
oscillator built around IC NE555, which onds. The timers output is connected is negatively clocked. Hence, when
is followed by a JK master-slave flip- to the clock terminal of JK master slave clock is high, the master is active and
flop (FF) IC CD4027. FF. the slave is inactive, and vice versa
On touching the metallic plate, the A master-slave JK FF is a combina- when the clock is low.
trigger terminal of IC NE555 mono- tion of two clocked RS latches. The When inputs J and K in the circuit

are high, the JK FF toggles.
If Q output was high on
the previous pulse, it be-
comes low. Hence,
Q output changes to
the complement of last
state, when both J and K
are connected to Vcc level
and positive going clock
pulse is fed to the clock
terminal. With each finger
touch, a positive pulse of
3 to 10 seconds is pro-
duced across pin 3 of
NE555 IC, and this is ap-
plied to clock pin 3 of IC
CD4027.
The output voltage of
IC CD4027 is connected to base termi- used for the purpose. As the voltage is should be a good conductor, so that
nal of transistor BC148 (T2) through applied on the base terminal of transis- the plates size can be limited to 15mm
10k resistor R4 to energise the relay. tor T1 through 10k resistor R6, in dia.
The diode is connected in reverse bias it goes into saturation, and current flows 2. The wire used to connect the
mode to protect the relay from back through the transistor (collector to touch-plate and pin 2 of IC NE555
emf. emitter), instead of the LED. This should be as thin as possible.
The circuit also gives visual indica- changes the colour of the LED to green, 3. A suitable capacitor may be used
tion of the touch switch, using a bi- indicating the operation of the touch- to avoid sparking in relay. Alternatively,
colour LED. Before touching the touch- switch. a triac may be used, instead of the re-
plate, the LED shows red colour. On Some of the precautions that need lay.
touching the plate, the LED changes its to be taken are: 4. The earthing of the ciruit should
colour to green. An npn transistor (Tl) is 1. The metal used as a touch plate be proper.
REMOTE TV TESTER
SUPRAVAT DAS
I ts a very useful circuit for all TV

technicians and service engineers.
The circuit can be assembled on a
piece of veroboard. Basically, it is a
hi-fi VHF oscillator, which oscillates
with the help of transistor BF194B
and some other parts. A horizontal line
pattern and audio tone is produced on
the TV screen, which makes the re-
pairing of VIF stage faults quite easier.
The circuit works on a 3V battery.
By changing the value of 4.7F ca-
pacitor C2 and the number of turns of
L2, the number of horizontal lines can
be changed.
The tester can work up to five the circuit and keep it at a distance is poor, change the direction of
metres distance. To get a wider range, of three metres. Set the TV (B&W) antenna towards the TV set, and your
the length of the telescopic antenna has on channels 5, 11 or 12 for better remote TV tester starts working
to be increased. reception of horizontal line pattern perfectly.
For testing purposes, assemble and audio tone. If the reception

pH METER
NAVEEN SHARMA
K nowledge of pH value of a given

solution is often needed in dye-
ing and pharmaceutical industries, etc.
lower, while IC2 is configured as an
inverting amplifier, with a gain of 10.
Pot. VR2 is an offset cancellation
For calibration, the pH electrodes
are dipped in a fluid of known pH value,
and VR2 is adjusted till a correct read-
The term pH is a measure of the de- control. The offset control is adjusted ing is obtained on a DVM/DMM. The
gree of acidity or alkalinity in a solu- to set output to 7volts when the input power supply for the circuit is straight-
tion. voltage is zero. forward. It uses regulators of type 7812
The circuit has two op-amp stages VR1 is a multiturn pot. It is and 7912 in standard configuration.
in which IC1 is used as a voltage fol- used for calibration of the pH meter.
CORDLESS INTERCOM
PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
T he intercom circuit described here

is simple, low-cost and cordless.
It operates on AC mains. The co-
between phase, neutral and earth is in-
sufficient, due to poor and old wiring,
a potential difference may be found
The signal is carried through the
neutral and earth wires. In case, a wrong
connection is made while servicing, the
mmunication between two units is car- between the neutral and earth lines. The high line voltage can prove very harm-
ried out through the supply lines. safe difference is 1 volt to 2 volts. If ful for the intercom. It would burn all
As we know, in single phase AC the voltage difference is more, the in- components of the set. So, an auto-
supply, the potential between neutral tercom may get damaged; use of a sepa- shut-off system is provided in the set
and earth is zero under ideal condi- rate wire is recommended in that situa- which disconnects the communication
tions. But if the insulation resistance tion. line when such a mistake occurs.
According to the normal domestic and LED2. also damage the equipment, if it is
wiring regulations, a 3-pin tops right The wiring is such that only in this switched on with a wrong connection.
hand pin facing the switchboard is con- condition the circuit is complete for This is prevented by switch Sl which
nected to the live wire and the left hand conversation. Any irregularity in con- should be kept in on position after
pin is connected to neutral wire. The nections switches off the line. So, in connection of the relays. This ar-
big remaining pin gets connected to case of a wrong connection, the rangement prevents the swing of volt-
earth wire. Under normal conditions, communication line disconnects itself age that may damage the circuit. Be-
when all connections are according to from the fatal voltage. Two capacitors sides, an alarm rings to indicate pres-
the rules, relays RL1 and RL2 are are provided for preventing slow dis- ence of high voltage in the communica-
energised, while RL3 is de-energised. charge in this condition. tion line. The switches Sl and S2 are
This is indicated by glowing of LEDl But a momentary high voltage may ganged together, enabling the alarm,

when high voltage away from the speaker to avoid howl- via capacitor C20. As this circuit also
is present. Using discrete components, ing sound due to feedback during use. uses the 230V AC to 6V DC convert-
the mains 230V AC is dropped to A separate switch for feedback path is ers, it is dangerous to touch any of its
6V to power the circuit. provided to call on the other set. The parts while working.
It is, however, dangerous to touch speaker should be placed in front of There should be no sound from the
any part of the intercom in working con- the cabinet. alarm on switching on the set. If there
dition. IC CA810 and two transistors The optional alarm circuit is built is a sound, check the line polarity. Plug
form an audio amplifier. However, one around IC 741, which is wired as a in the two units in the same neutral and
may use any audio amplifier circuit for square wave generator. The feedback earth wires.
better performance. The supply for am- resistor determines the frequency of It has been found that the range of
plifier may be taken from a good ripple- sound. Output available at pin 6 of IC this intercom is 50 to 70 metres, with a
free and filtered power supply unit. 741 is amplified by push-pull transis- medium volume. Each unit may cost
The microphone should be kept tors T1 and T2 and fed to the speaker around Rs 300 to make.
Readers Comments:
The transmission through mains wir-
ing is not new for EFY readers. An
article by Amrit Bir Tiwana on this
subject has already been published in
Jan.92 issue. The only new thing in
this circuit is protection against any
wrong connection.
Here is a circuit which protects the
intercom against any wrong connec-
tion and also maintains potential dif-
ference between neutral and earth
within a required level. Here the volt
age drop for one diode = 0.6V, two through them. These diodes also pro- type of interchange may be possible.
diodes = 1.5V, three diodes = 3V, when tect the circuit if the potential differ- 2. The circuit will not respond if N
connected in series. ence between N and E increases and and E terminals (from supply line) are
If in the circuit, the phase and maintains it at 3V. interchanged.
earth wires are interchanged (by C.H. Swa Raghu Ram 3. Possibilities are there that the di-
mistake) a short circuit occurs and Guntur odes may get burnt off.
the fuse blows off. During blow-off 4. The circuit may work with poor
the circuit will not be damaged The author, Pradip Kumar Bose, wiring also, but it is recommended to
because the maximum potential replies: connect the intercom with good wir-
difference between neutral and earth Regarding the letter of Mr Raghu ing, having very low line leakage.
is 3V (can be decreased to 0.6V by Ram from Guntur, I would like to point 5. The circuit does not completely
using one diode and 1.5V by using two out: isolate the intercom from supply, which
diodes in series between N and E). 1. In his circuit it is assumed that is necessary for safety. My circuit costs
The diodes between N and E will not only phase and earth may be inter- a little more, but is sufficiently safe to
affect the audio frequency passing changed by mistake. In practice, any use with the intercom.
A SIMPLE BATTERY CHARGER

SUPRAVAT DAS
T he circuit presented here can

charge two pencil type nickel-cad-
mium or carbon-zinc dry battery cells
6V-0-6V, 300mA step-down trans-
former provides 12V unregulated power
supply. Regulator transistor Tl is used
charge the cells. The charging current
of this circuit is not more than 50 mA,
while the charging time is approxi-
with a single charger. In this charger a to produce 4V regulated supply to mately 20 hours.

The circuit may be assembled eas-
ily on a piece of veroboard and en-
closed in a small battery eliminator box.
A small heatsink is needed for transis-
tor Tl.
Before charging a cell it is neces-
sary to measure the charging current.
If it is more than 50mA then the value
of resistor R2 should be increased ac-
cordingly. A dry battery below 1V may
not be charged with the help of this
charger. Overcharging of cells should
be avoided.
Readers Comments: To perform such a function, some

With this circuit, even below 1V re- modifications are necessary. The cir-
chargeable batteries can be charged cuit given alongside can be used as an
nicely. Could the author please suggest AC adaptor.
the use of this circuit as an AC adaptor, With the help of this battery charger,
so that it can perform as a dual-pur- Ni-Cd batteries below 1V can be
pose circuit? charged very well. But in case of car-
T. Ramesh bon-zinc dry battery, it may not charge
Bangalore the batteries well.
The author, Supravat Das, replies:
I agree with Mr Ramesh that this tor for radio receivers or other elec-
circuit can also be used as an AC adap- tronic gadgets.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FOR POWER AMPLIFIERS
V. VIDYALAL, K. RAJASREE AND V. SIVANAND
A part from MOSFET-driven output

stages, the danger of thermal run-
way also exists in semiconductor based
However, a need often arises for an
early warning (audio/visual) to prevent
such a disaster.
ner diode (Dl) provides the constant
voltage for the bridge.
An inexpensive and easily avail-
power amplifiers. This danger mani- The circuit described here provides able comparator (LM311) is chosen for
fests itself when the current through a an audio as well as a visual indication rapid switching. When the sensor re-
semiconductor creates so much heat as when the temperature increases beyond sistor R2 gets hot (due to its proximity
to raise its temperature above a critical a certain limit. to the semiconductor) its resistance de-
level. Since the semi-conductor has a IC LM311 is configured as a com- creases. This trips the comparator due
negative temperature coefficient of re- parator. Its reference level is set by to the difference in voltage settings at
sistance, the increase in current leads to preset VR1. The other two arms of the the inputs and its output goes high.
the increase of temperature and finally bridge are resistors Rl and R2 where This is visually displayed by LED1 and
to the destruction of the device. This R2 is the sense resistor. A 0.5-watt an audible note from the buzzer.
effect can be avoided by incorporating carbon resistor is used, instead of IC LM311 can drive loads requir-
devices with positive temperature coef- semiconductors, for the sake of higher ing currents up to 50 mA (max.),
ficients, such as thermistors, or by suit- reliability and ruggedness. This also whereas in case of LM741 only 25 mA
able feedback circuits. makes the unit inexpensive. A 5.1V ze- (max.) is possible. Therefore, relays

drawing less than 50 mA can be di- mometer. Adjust pot. VR1 for the adjustment can also be done by fixing
rectly connected to the output. This re- buzzer to sound and the LED to light it to the actual heatsink whose tem-
quires costly relays, and an alternative up. (This temperature should be equiva- perature is to be monitored and preset-
is to use a transistor to drive the relay. lent to that from the heatsink on which ting pot. VR1, so that the buzzer sounds
Setting this up is fairly simple. Keep the semiconductor is fixed.) Air cool and the LED lights up when tempera-
the sensor resistor (R2) in close proxim- the sensor and lap it to the heatsink ture reaches the danger point.
ity to some hot material whose tem- whose temperature is to be monitored.
perature can be monitored by a ther- This is only a crude method and an
TELEPHONE MONITOR
RAJAN GUPTA
W ith this circuit connected to the

telephone line, it will be pos-
sible to detect whether any unauth-
orised telephone set is connected to
your telephone line.
The heart of this circuit is a quad
comparator IC (LM339). The DC volt-
age level on a telephone line drops from
48V to 12V when a telephone is in use,
and it further drops to 8 volts when
two telephone sets are connected in
parallel. IC1 detects this voltage level.
LED1 lights up when one telephone
receiver is picked up. LED2 also lights
up when another telephone is picked
up.
To adjust VR1 and VR2, pick up
one telephone set and adjust VR1 until
LED 1 glows. Now, hold the first
set and pick up the second set and ad-
just preset VR2 until LED2 glows. Use
a 9V transistor battery to power the
circuit.

A BINARY FREQUENCY METER
NARESH TYAGI
F or an average electronics hobb-

yist, it is not always possible to
buy a frequency meter because it is
connected in cascade form. Their out-
puts are connected to 24 red LEDs,
which display the unknown input fre-
Q9 is used to reset the counter ICs
(IC1 and IC2).
Transistor Tl prevents the clock in-
pretty expensive. Here is an alterna- quency in binary form. put of the counter from accepting too
tive with one difference that this meter The binary counter typically counts high values.
displays frequency in binary form, in 1,2,4,8,16... sequence, i.e. 2n. So, Now, for instance, if the reading
rather than decimal. But that is pre- in this case, the 24-stage binary of your binary frequency meter is
cisely what makes it so cost-effective. counter can count as much as 224, i.e. 10001001, the frequency in decimal is
However, with a little practice, it is up to 16.7 MHz. given by 27+23+l=l28+8+1=137 Hz.
not so difficult to understand the bi- IC 555 generates 1 Hz pulse, A regulated power supply should
nary readings. which is fed to the decade counter IC be used with this circuit. The level of
At the heart of this circuit are two 4017. The output Q0 from IC 4017 is the input signal at buffer transistor Tl
12-stage binary counter ICs (CD4040), fed to a NAND gate of IC 4011 and should not be less than 2V rms.
Readers Comments: gular or sawtooth. with IC 555 is uneconomical. It is bet-

The circuit of Binary Frequency The impedance at the input of tran- ter to use a NAND gate multivibrator.
Meter is very useful and interesting, sistor T1 is very low, producing load- These disadvantages can be over-
but it has some limitations. For ing effect on the circuit under mea- come completely by using the follow-
instance, it cannot be used for measurement, so further amplification of ing modified circuit.
surement of analogue frequencies the signal is needed. For measuring analogue frequency,
of such waveforms as sinusoidal, trian- Use of one NAND gate (CD4011) the circuit using a schmitt trigger (IC

CD4093) is described here. fixed resistor?
Also, we can use IC CD4011, in- Sudarshan Hegde
stead of IC 555 for generating 1Hz Bangalore
pulse, since the oscillator wired with
NAND gates is very stable. The author, Naresh
D.S. Vidyasagar Tyagi, replies:
Akola We can use this cir-
The circuit idea A Binary Frequency cuit for counting sinu-
Meter is very good, but instead of the soidal frequencies, pro-
simple LEDs can we use 7-segment vided their amplitude >
displays? If yes, what will be the re- 2V rms.
quired modifications? We can use 9 or 12
Atal V. Kulkarni volts power supply, but
Beed we will have to change
Can I use this circuit for counting the current limiting resistor R5 to 120- tried because of the electrolytic capaci-
sine wave frequencies? ohm, 1 watt. tor.
Can I increase the power supply to Theoretically, we can calculate the Tantalum capacitors are easily avail-
9 or 12 volts, as CMOS ICs are used in value of resistance with the help of the able. I designed the circuit, keeping
the circuit? formula: the cost in mind. But a 7-segment dis-
Can I replace VR1 with a fixed re- f = 1.44 play may be used after modifying the
sistor, using the given power supply? (R1 + 2R2) C1 circuit. For this, please refer to such
What should be the exact value of the But in practice, it did not work when I circuits, published earlier in EFY.
CARETAKER FOR
HOME APPLIANCES
B.S. MALIK
T his circuit is an improved version

of the Auto-Cut circuit used nor-
mally for protecting the home appli-
ances against very high and very low
voltages. Its advantages are that its in-
ternal components are also safeguarded
and it uses the more reliable and
cheaper silicon transistors.
In the circuit, RL1 and RL2 are
double-contact relays. S1 is a switch
for the panel meter. Switch S2 is meant
for resetting the system.
X1 is a step-down, centre-tapped
mains transformer. Diodes Dl and D2
form a full-wave rectifier. Capacitor
Cl is for smoothing the rectified volt-
age. Transistor Tl is for high voltage
tripping. Diodes D3 and D4 avoid back
emf effect in relay coils. Capacitors C2
and C3 avoid chattering effect in re-
lays and provide a delay time for their
re-energising states.
Resistors Rl and R4 provide emit-
ter bias to transistors Tl and T2 respec-
tively and limit current flow for safety.

Presets VR1 and VR2, which supply safe. The red neon glows to indicate AC to the input and press switch S2
base currents to the transistors, can the out-of-range voltage. momentarily. Relay RL2 should oper-
be adjusted as per requirements. If line voltage rises above 250V, ate. If it does not, adjust preset VR2.
Resistor R2, zener D5 and resistor relay RL1 energises and RLl(a)s cen- Also, ensure through the use of preset
R3 provide base bias for Tl. Similarly, tre contact shift to disconnect the load. VR1 that the relay RL1 remains unaf-
resistor R5, zener D6 and resistor The centre contact of RL1(b) opens fected. The voltmeter connected at the
R6 provide base bias for transistor T2. line voltage path to X1s primary. So, output should indicate 230V and the
Red and green neon are used as indica- the circuit and the load are once again green neon should glow.
tors. safe. The red neon glows again. If Now, test the circuit for out-of-range
The functioning of this circuit cen- RL2s de-energising time (due to ca- operation by varying the voltage to
tres around the two relays. If line volt- pacitor C3) is greater than that of RL1 slightly less 170V and then slightly
age goes below 170V, relay RL2 de- (due to capacitor C2), then the relays more than 250V, respectively. Do press
energises. Due to this, its RL2(a) con- may chatter. To avoid this, the value of S2 each time. In both cases, the red
tacts open and disconnect the load, C2 is kept larger than that of C3. neon should glow and the output of the
whereas the RL2(b) contacts open and To test the circuit, take a variable circuit should be zero.
disconnect the line voltage from the AC voltage source and connect it to If relays chatter, try using a capaci-
primary of transformer X1. So, the con- the input. Connect an AC voltmeter to tor of 22F, 25V for C2, instead of
trol circuitry as well as the load are the output of the circuit. Apply 230V 10F, 25V.
Readers Comments: of T2. Give supply, press S2 and ob- relays, whereas one relay is sufficient
I was really glad to see the article serve. You can see that RL2 keeps for the same work. A simple and
on Caretaker for Home Appliances. energised in between the predetermined economical circuit is given in the fig-
But it really misled me. It was only voltages of 170V and 250V AC. ure below.
a primary cut-off arrangement with two Beyond these limits, the relay I have used only one DPDT relay
relays. The very same purpose can be stays de-energised and the primary of successfully. High voltage setting
achieved, using only one relay. the transformer stays cut off till S2 is is done by VR1 and low voltage
With one SPDT relay (RL2), one pressed again. setting by VR2.
may just change the connections as fol- Another circuit captioned Auto When a low voltage occurs, zener
lows: Protection for Refrigerator, which was D3 will not break down and transistor
AC input L(phase)goes to RL2(b) published in July 93 issue, also uses T2 will be off, relay is de-energised
common contact. Contact N/O (nor- two relays. I suggest that an auto-gad- and the gadget is off. For a high volt-
mally open) goes to appliance. In be- get, which is designed to control the age condition, zener D1 will break
tween these contacts, connect S2 and line voltage to a motor, should have a down, transistor T1 will be on and
the green neon. Between common con- suitable delay. relay again gets de-energised. So, the
tacts of RL2(b) and N/C (normally Narain P. Menokee gadget is isolated from the line volt-
closed) contact, connect the red neon. Calicut age. The circuit controls gadgets from
Avoid RL1 and allied components. Let The circuit for Caretaker for 175V to 230V AC.
the neutral stay as it is. Home appliances is very good, but Jayanta Kumar Chakraborty
Connect collector of T1 to base it is expensive due to use of two Dumka

The author, B.S. Malik, replies: been using my circuit since last eight circuit with the letter for a clear under-
Mr Menokee has suggested the use years without any complaint. standing. Also, he has suggested a suit-
of a single relay after some modifica- The ideas of these readers seem able delay for controlling the
tions in the article. And the same idea somewhat convincing theoretically, but line voltage to a motor of the fridge.
was also suggested by Mr Chakraborty. practice may reveal the truth. How- This is done already in the published
I have not tried their ideas, as I have ever, Mr Menokee should have sent his article.
40W+40W AUTO-REVERSE
STEREO CASSETTE PLAYER
MOHIT MISHRA
T his circuit will reverse the direc-

tion of movement of the audio cas-
sette tape automatically after the side
The circuit comprises three stages
preamplifier, auto reverse and power
amplifier. The preamplifier is built
stage is built around IC UPC6304,
which is a single-in-line IC. An npn
transistor C2270 is also used in this
has been fully played. This permits a around IC LA3161. It can also be built stage. The power amplifier is built
continuous play of music without hav- around ICs UPC1032, UPC1186H or around two UPC 1230H ICs, which
ing to reverse the tape manually. Of M5152L. at 12V give an output of 40W at 4-
course, an auto-reverse mechanism The frequency response of this ohm load. Pin 9 of both the ICs and
would be required. stage is quite good. The auto-reverse pin 4 of the preamp IC should be con-

nected to the supply, i.e. point A. A by the choke coil. Care should be proper reception, a good auto reverse
current of 2 to 4 amperes is given taken of the pin configuration of ICs, stereo head (glass ferrite) should be
through the supply, which is regulated since these are single-in-line ICs. For used.
REMOTE TV HEADPHONES
PRADEEP G.
T he circuit described here enables

one to listen to sound from a TV
set without disturbing others. It uses a
IC, meant for pocket radios. It is
a compact receiver with 1.5-volt
cell, housed inside a match-box
go to VHF range and so no disturbance
will be introduced in the
TV picture or sound.
transmitter and a receiver. The trans- sized plastic cabinet. It has a hole In case, you start hearing a
mitter is of AM type, working in MW for the headphone socket. programme from a radio station instead,
range, which can
be kept near the
TV set. Output of
the audio ampli-
fier (headphone
socket) can be
connected to the
transmitter.
Power supply
to the transmitter
can be derived
from the TV set it-
self. A separate
DC supply can
also be used, if de-
sired. The use of
a battery gives
perfectly distor-
tion-free output.
The receiver is based on 2Z414, As the transmitter uses an iron core the frequency of operation of the cir-
a popular RF amplifier-cum-detector oscillator coil, the harmonics will never cuit can be changed.
Readers Comments: market. However, YS414 is available this transformer?

The circuit of Remote TV Headphones which costs about Rs 35. MVS Rao
was very interesting. But I have some I request the author to give internal Hyderabad
doubts about assembling this circuit. structure of ZN414 or YS414. This circuit is very useful for
1. Please give the correct configu- While using YS414, pins 1 and me but how much does the ZN414 IC
ration of IC ZN414. 3 should be interchanged. In the re- cost?
2. How can I get the complete kit ceiver circuit, one end of the MW an- I used BF194, instead of SL100.
or PCB? Please, mention its cost, etc? tenna coil was connected to negative What is the rating of output trans-
3. What is the maximum range terminal of the battery. This connec- former3 or 6 volt? What is the range
of operation between the transmitter tion should be disconnected for proper of transmitter?
and the receiver? functioning of the receiver. A.N. Babbu
A.G. Poiya Mozhi What is the function of audio out- Rajahmundry
Madras put transformer in the transmitter? If The circuit diagrams of the transmit-
The circuit is very interesting. We we connect the secondary of the trans- ter and receiver have some mistakes. In
can listen to the TV, using this head- former in parallel to the TV speaker, the circuit for L1, you have marked See
phone. then the sound from the speaker de- Text. But in the text, there is no men-
IC ZN414 is not available in the creases. How can we avoid the use of tion of L1 and its description.

Allan On switching the receiver on, I IC YS414 can be used, instead
Mysore got a shrill sound. I selected a silent of ZN414. Pin configuration and
Please clarify the following queries: zone in MW band and the sound internal structure of IC ZN414 have
1. What is the value of L1 and reduced, but I found that on placing been published on page 104 of Feb 94
from which point the coil should be the receiver near (within 3 metres) issue.
tapped? Please, specify its complete TV set the sound increased. How- Modulator transformer is a general-
construction method. ever, I was able to receive the audio purpose audio output transformer. Cen-
2. Specify the type of audio output signal, but it was backed by some noise tre-tap of primary windings is not used.
transformer, used in the circuit. produced by TV set. The background Transformer is 6-volt type.
3. What is the maximum output noise was very irritating. Also, the The circuit can be operated up to 10
power of the receiver and the imped- sound quality of transmitter was very metres, without any wire connection to
ance of the headphones? poor. 10 metres and without any wire connec-
4. Specify the range of the system. A reader from Calcutta tion to the TV set. Instead of TV set, a
M. Kumar tape recorder can also be used.
Hardwar The author, Pradeep G., replies: IC ZN414 can be obtained from
I have made the circuit, but it failed. I am thankful to all who have taken Visha Electronics, Bombay for Rs 30.
I used the transmitter circuit keen interest in my circuit idea. Audio transformer is pushpull type,
as usual, but replaced the receiver L1 is made of 90 turns with 36SWG which is serially used in audio receiver
with a MW pocket radio set. I copper wire over ferrite rod. The coil and bird bells.
also powered the transmitter separately is tapped at 75th turn. Output power of the receiver is
through a battery. Capacitor C4 (0.01) should be con- a few milli watts. Any type of
While operating, I found noise nected between MW antenna coil and headphones or small speaker can be
in the TV. However, on adjustment, the ground. It should not be connected di- used.
noise disappeared. rectly to the ground.
INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL TESTER

PRADIP KUMAR BOSE
T he circuit described here is

basically of an infrared light con-
trolled electronic switch, which can also
circuit is a silicon photodiode D3. It is
used in reverse bias with a series resis-
tance. The reverse current of this diode
After assembling the circuit prop-
erly, take any remote control transmit-
ter of any TV or VCR and focus its
be used to control a remote gadget. varies with the infrared wave, and this signal on D3. The LED should glow
This switch will help detect faults and is the basic idea of this circuit. The and remain in the same state even
check the working of a remote control variable signal is then amplified and when the signal is removed. In case it
transmitter. detected to light up the LED. doesnt glow, check the voltages at
Transistor T1 works as an electronic The circuit works on 9V supply for different locations. If necessary, use a
switch, which makes the LED glow which a battery is recommended. It convex lens and place D3 on its fo-
when any infrared signal is detected draws very little current in idle condi- cus. Now, it should work. The gadget
through the sensor IR-LED. Diodes Dl tion. will work from a distance of 15 cms
and D2 work as rectifiers to switch on
the LED-driver circuit. Capacitor Cl is
used to produce a constant base bias
when an infrared signal is detected even
for a very short period.
Transistors T2 and T3 constitute an
infrared signal amplifier. The gain of
this pair is suitable for detection and
amplification of medium and strong in-
frared signals. The interconnection be-
tween the two stages is made by RC
coupling. Capacitor C4 is used to
couple the amplifier with the detecting
device.
The main infrared detector in the

to 30 cms. an infrared transmitter filter should be used, instead. To drive high voltage
If the LED glows with normal light, used to cover D3. A red glass may be load, a relay driver can be used in place
of the LED.
Readers Comments: and it is working well. However, the 1. The range of the tester is com-
I have made the project successfully. It range is very low! paratively low for testing purpose only.
is working well. I found a range of Sudhir sinha The range can be increased by adding
about sixty centimeter without connect- Bidhan Nagar IR amplifier.
ing any lens or filter. 2. The circuit can also be used as a
H.B. Tiwana The author, P.K. Bose, replies: remote control.
Bangalore The following was observed while
I successfully assembled the circuit making the prototype:
SOFT RADIO/ CASSETTE SELECTOR

NAVIN GAUTAM
M ost radio-cassette players have a

mechanical radio/cassette se-
lector switch. Here is a simple elec-
T4, one can change the state of
multivibrator.
For switching of audio signal to
multivibrator via transistors T5 and
T6.
Transistors T7 and T8 provide volt-
tronic circuit, which selects radio or cassette, CMOS bila- ages to radio and its amplifier circuit,
radio/cassette electronically with a soft teral switch CD4066 is used. when the switch is in radio position.
finger touch. The circuit is simple and The four independent switches LED 1 and LED2 are used to indicate
self- explanatory. contained within the IC are so ar- the position of switch. Breakdown
Transistors Tl and T2 are arra- ranged that the IC works as a double- voltage for zener diode D3 can be
nged as a bistable multivibrator. By pole double-throw (DPDT) switch. selected, as per requirement of the
touching the base of transistor T3 or This switch is controlled by the radio.

Electronics Projects Volume 15 Bak PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electronics Projects Volume 15 Bak PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electronics Projects Volume 15 Bak PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the infrared remote control tester circuit?

What is the purpose of the infrared remote control tester circuit?

What components are used in the infrared remote control tester circuit and what is their purpose?

What components are used in the infrared remote control tester circuit and what is their purpose?

Electronics Projects

EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any

ISBN 81- 88152 -08 -0

Published by Ramesh Chopra for EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd,

In keeping with the past trend, all modifications, corrections and

This collection of a large number of tested circuit ideas and

For retail orders: For magazine subscriptions: For bulk orders:

KitsnSpares EFY Enterprises Pvt Ltd Paramount Book Agency

Section A: Construction Projects

1. A Versatile Receiver for DXers ................................................................................. 3

Section B: Circuit Ideas:

1. Digital Even and Odd Parity Checker/Generator ...................................................... 94

Fig.2: Circuit diagram of the receiver.

Fig.4: Component layout of the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 1. Block schematic of the composite dial clock.

Fig.3: The alarm circuit.

Fig. 1: Block diagram for the HI-FI stereo deck

Fig. 3: PCB layout for the chess clock.

Fig. 5: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 6: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 4.

Resistors (all 1/4watt, +5% carbon unless

Fig. 4: Component layout of the cordless security system.

VIVEKANANDA K.S. AND ZAMEERUDDIN

Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless

time period is proportional to the value

Testing the unit

Resistors(all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless

Fig. 4(b): Audio-visual polarity reversal alarm.

Fig. 6: Mains leakage alarm circuit.

Fig. 8: Electronic variable 'blowing speed' fuse.

PRADIP KUMAR BOSE

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the portable SMD soldering station.

Resistors (all 1/4 watt, 5% carbon unless

such cost-effective equipment.

Fig. 1: Block diagram for the digital controller.

on. After one and a half hour, the

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the VOX.

Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the steady hand game.

Fig. 1: Block diagram for the teleconversation limiter.

Assembly and testing

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the main programmable number

Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 6: PCB layout for the circuit shown in Fig. 2.

DINESH KUMAR RAHEJA

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the humidity controller.

Fig. 1: Block diagram for the door-bell-cum-security alarm

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the doorbell-cum-security alarm.

Fig. 4: Component layout for the PCB shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 1: Block diagram for the three-phase power supply card.

Fig. 2: Circuit diagram for the card.

Fig. 1: Circuit diagram for the solidstate advertisement display.

Resistors (all 1/4 watt, +5% carbon unless

Fig. 2: Actual-size PCB layout for the advertisement display. Capacitors: